ANSYS Mechanical APDL Material Reference

ANSYS, Inc. Release 14.0

Southpointe November 2011
275 Technology Drive
Canonsburg, PA 15317 ANSYS, Inc. is
[email protected] certified to ISO
http://www.ansys.com 9001:2008.
(T) 724-746-3304
(F) 724-514-9494
Copyright and Trademark Information
© 2011 SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use, distribution or duplication is prohibited.

ANSYS, ANSYS Workbench, Ansoft, AUTODYN, EKM, Engineering Knowledge Manager, CFX, FLUENT, HFSS and any
and all ANSYS, Inc. brand, product, service and feature names, logos and slogans are registered trademarks or
trademarks of ANSYS, Inc. or its subsidiaries in the United States or other countries. ICEM CFD is a trademark used
by ANSYS, Inc. under license. CFX is a trademark of Sony Corporation in Japan. All other brand, product, service
and feature names or trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Disclaimer Notice
THIS ANSYS SOFTWARE PRODUCT AND PROGRAM DOCUMENTATION INCLUDE TRADE SECRETS AND ARE CONFID-
ENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY PRODUCTS OF ANSYS, INC., ITS SUBSIDIARIES, OR LICENSORS. The software products
and documentation are furnished by ANSYS, Inc., its subsidiaries, or affiliates under a software license agreement
that contains provisions concerning non-disclosure, copying, length and nature of use, compliance with exporting
laws, warranties, disclaimers, limitations of liability, and remedies, and other provisions. The software products
and documentation may be used, disclosed, transferred, or copied only in accordance with the terms and conditions
of that software license agreement.
ANSYS, Inc. is certified to ISO 9001:2008.

U.S. Government Rights

For U.S. Government users, except as specifically granted by the ANSYS, Inc. software license agreement, the use,
duplication, or disclosure by the United States Government is subject to restrictions stated in the ANSYS, Inc.
software license agreement and FAR 12.212 (for non-DOD licenses).

Third-Party Software
See the legal information in the product help files for the complete Legal Notice for ANSYS proprietary software
and third-party software. If you are unable to access the Legal Notice, please contact ANSYS, Inc.

Published in the U.S.A.

Table of Contents
1. Introduction to Material Models ............................................................................................................. 1
1.1. Material Models for Displacement Applications ................................................................................. 1
1.2. Material Models for Temperature Applications ................................................................................... 2
1.3. Material Models for Electromagnetic Applications ............................................................................. 2
1.4. Material Models for Coupled Applications ......................................................................................... 3
1.5. Material Parameters .......................................................................................................................... 3
2. Element Support for Material Models .................................................................................................... 5
3. Material Models .................................................................................................................................... 13
3.1. Understanding Material Data Tables ................................................................................................ 13
3.2. Experimental Data .......................................................................................................................... 14
3.3. Linear Material Properties ............................................................................................................... 14
3.3.1. Defining Linear Material Properties ......................................................................................... 15
3.3.2. Stress-Strain Relationships ...................................................................................................... 17
3.3.3. Damping ............................................................................................................................... 18
3.3.4. Thermal Expansion ................................................................................................................. 18
3.3.5. Emissivity ............................................................................................................................... 20
3.3.6. Specific Heat .......................................................................................................................... 20
3.3.7. Film Coefficients ..................................................................................................................... 20
3.3.8. Temperature Dependency ...................................................................................................... 20
3.3.9. How Material Properties Are Evaluated ................................................................................... 20
3.4. Plasticity Models ............................................................................................................................. 20
3.4.1. Bilinear Kinematic Hardening ................................................................................................. 22
3.4.2. Multilinear Kinematic Hardening ............................................................................................ 22
3.4.3. Nonlinear Kinematic Hardening .............................................................................................. 24
3.4.4. Bilinear Isotropic Hardening ................................................................................................... 25
3.4.5. Multilinear Isotropic Hardening .............................................................................................. 25
3.4.6. Nonlinear Isotropic Hardening ................................................................................................ 26
3.4.7. Anisotropic ............................................................................................................................ 26
3.4.8. Hill's Anisotropy ..................................................................................................................... 27
3.4.9. Drucker-Prager ....................................................................................................................... 28
3.4.10. Extended Drucker-Prager ..................................................................................................... 29
3.4.11. EDP Cap Material .................................................................................................................. 30
3.4.12. Gurson's Model .................................................................................................................... 31
3.4.13. Multilinear Elastic ................................................................................................................. 32
3.4.14. Cast Iron Plasticity Material ................................................................................................... 33
3.5. Hyperelastic Material Models .......................................................................................................... 33
3.5.1. Arruda-Boyce Hyperelastic Material ........................................................................................ 34
3.5.2. Blatz-Ko Foam Hyperelastic Material ....................................................................................... 34
3.5.3. Extended Tube Material .......................................................................................................... 35
3.5.4. Gent Hyperelastic Material ..................................................................................................... 35
3.5.5. Mooney-Rivlin Hyperelastic Material ....................................................................................... 36
3.5.6. Neo-Hookean Hyperelastic Material ........................................................................................ 37
3.5.7. Ogden Compressible Foam Hyperelastic Material .................................................................... 38
3.5.8. Ogden Hyperelastic Material .................................................................................................. 39
3.5.9. Polynomial Form Hyperelastic Material ................................................................................... 40
3.5.10. Response Function Hyperelastic Material .............................................................................. 41
3.5.11.Yeoh Hyperelastic Material .................................................................................................... 42
3.5.12. Special Hyperelastic Material Models .................................................................................... 43
3.5.12.1. Anisotropic Hyperelastic Material ................................................................................. 43
3.5.12.2. Bergstrom-Boyce Material ............................................................................................ 44

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. iii
ANSYS Mechanical APDL Material Reference

3.5.12.3. Mullins Effect ............................................................................................................... 45

3.5.12.4. User-Defined Hyperelastic Material .............................................................................. 46
3.6. Viscoelastic Material Model ............................................................................................................. 46
3.6.1. Viscoelastic Formulation ......................................................................................................... 46
3.6.1.1. Small Deformation ......................................................................................................... 46
3.6.1.2. Small Strain with Large Deformation .............................................................................. 49
3.6.1.3. Large Deformation ........................................................................................................ 49
3.6.2. Time-Temperature Superposition ........................................................................................... 50
3.6.2.1. Williams-Landel-Ferry Shift Function .............................................................................. 51
3.6.2.2. Tool-Narayanaswamy Shift Function ............................................................................... 51
3.6.2.3. User-Defined Shift Function ........................................................................................... 53
3.6.3. Harmonic Viscoelasticity ......................................................................................................... 53
3.6.3.1. Prony Series Complex Modulus ...................................................................................... 54
3.6.3.2. Experimental Data Complex Modulus ............................................................................ 54
3.6.3.3. Frequency-Temperature Superposition .......................................................................... 55
3.6.3.4. Stress ............................................................................................................................ 56
3.7. Microplane Material Model ............................................................................................................. 56
3.7.1. Microplane Modeling ............................................................................................................. 56
3.7.1.1. Discretization ................................................................................................................ 58
3.7.2. Material Models with Degradation and Damage ..................................................................... 58
3.7.3. Material Parameters Definition and Example Input .................................................................. 61
3.7.4. Element Support for the Microplane Material Model ............................................................... 61
3.7.5. Learning More About Microplane Material Modeling .............................................................. 61
3.8. Porous Media .................................................................................................................................. 62
3.9. Magnetic Material Model ................................................................................................................ 62
3.10. High-Frequency Electromagnetic Material Models ......................................................................... 63
3.10.1. 3-D High-Frequency Material Properties ............................................................................... 63
3.10.1.1. Conductivity, Permittivity, and Permeability Matrices .................................................... 63
3.10.1.2. B-H Nonlinear Material Permeability Matrix .................................................................. 63
3.10.1.3. Anisotropic Electric and Magnetic Loss Tangents .......................................................... 65
3.10.1.4. Frequency-Dependent Lossy Dielectric ........................................................................ 66
3.10.2. 2-D High-Frequency Material Properties ............................................................................... 68
3.11. Anisotropic Elastic Material Model ................................................................................................. 69
3.12. Piezoelectric Material Model ......................................................................................................... 69
3.13. Piezoresistive Material Model ........................................................................................................ 70
3.14. Anisotropic Electric Permittivity Material Model ............................................................................. 72
3.15. Rate-Dependent Plastic (Viscoplastic) Material Models ................................................................... 72
3.15.1. Perzyna and Peirce Options .................................................................................................. 72
3.15.2. Exponential Visco-Hardening (EVH) Option ........................................................................... 73
3.15.3. Anand Option ...................................................................................................................... 74
3.15.4. Specifying Rate-Dependent Plasticity (Viscoplasticity) ........................................................... 74
3.16. Gasket Material Model .................................................................................................................. 75
3.17. Creep Equations ........................................................................................................................... 77
3.17.1. Implicit Creep Equations ....................................................................................................... 77
3.17.2. Explicit Creep Equations ....................................................................................................... 79
3.17.2.1. Primary Explicit Creep Equation for C6 = 0 .................................................................... 80
3.17.2.2. Primary Explicit Creep Equation for C6 = 1 .................................................................... 81
3.17.2.3. Primary Explicit Creep Equation for C6 = 2 .................................................................... 81
3.17.2.4. Primary Explicit Creep Equation for C6 = 9 .................................................................... 81
3.17.2.4.1. Double Exponential Creep Equation (C4 = 0) ....................................................... 81
3.17.2.4.2. Rational Polynomial Creep Equation with Metric Units (C4 = 1) ............................. 81
3.17.2.4.3. Rational Polynomial Creep Equation with English Units (C4 = 2) ........................... 82

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
iv of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 ANSYS Mechanical APDL Material Reference

3.17.2.5. Primary Explicit Creep Equation for C6 = 10 .................................................................. 82

3.17.2.5.1. Double Exponential Creep Equation (C4 = 0) ....................................................... 82
3.17.2.5.2. Rational Polynomial Creep Equation with Metric Units (C4 = 1) ............................. 83
3.17.2.5.3. Rational Polynomial Creep Equation with English Units (C4 = 2) ........................... 83
3.17.2.6. Primary Explicit Creep Equation for C6 = 11 .................................................................. 83
3.17.2.6.1. Modified Rational Polynomial Creep Equation (C4 = 0) ......................................... 83
3.17.2.6.2. Rational Polynomial Creep Equation with Metric Units (C4 = 1) ............................. 83
3.17.2.6.3. Rational Polynomial Creep Equation with English Units (C4 = 2) ........................... 84
3.17.2.7. Primary Explicit Creep Equation for C6 = 12 .................................................................. 84
3.17.2.8. Primary Explicit Creep Equation for C6 Equals 13 .......................................................... 85
3.17.2.9. Primary Explicit Creep Equation for C6 = 14 .................................................................. 85
3.17.2.10. Primary Explicit Creep Equation for C6 = 15 ................................................................ 86
3.17.2.11. Primary Explicit Creep Equation for C6 = 100 .............................................................. 86
3.17.2.12. Secondary Explicit Creep Equation for C12 = 0 ............................................................ 86
3.17.2.13. Secondary Explicit Creep Equation for C12 = 1 ............................................................ 87
3.17.2.14. Irradiation Induced Explicit Creep Equation for C66 = 5 ............................................... 87
3.18. Swelling Model ............................................................................................................................. 87
3.19. Shape Memory Alloy (SMA) Material Model ................................................................................... 88
3.19.1. Shape Memory Alloy Model for Superelasticity ...................................................................... 90
3.19.1.1. Constitutive Model for Superelasticity .......................................................................... 90
3.19.1.2. Material Parameters for the Superelastic SMA Material Model ....................................... 92
3.19.2. Shape Memory Material Model with Shape Memory Effect .................................................... 93
3.19.2.1. The Constitutive Model for Shape Memory Effect ......................................................... 93
3.19.2.2. Material Parameters for the Shape Memory Effect Option ............................................. 96
3.19.3. Element Support for SMA ..................................................................................................... 97
3.19.4. Learning More About Shape Memory Alloy ........................................................................... 97
3.20. MPC184 Joint Material Models ...................................................................................................... 97
3.20.1. Linear Elastic Stiffness and Damping Behavior ....................................................................... 98
3.20.2. Nonlinear Elastic Stiffness and Damping Behavior ................................................................. 99
3.20.2.1. Specifying a Function Describing Nonlinear Stiffness Behavior .................................... 100
3.20.3. Frictional Behavior .............................................................................................................. 100
3.21. Contact Friction .......................................................................................................................... 103
3.21.1. Isotropic Friction ................................................................................................................ 103
3.21.2. Orthotropic Friction ............................................................................................................ 103
3.21.3. Redefining Friction Between Load Steps ............................................................................. 104
3.21.4. User-Defined Friction .......................................................................................................... 105
3.22. Cohesive Zone Material Model .................................................................................................... 105
3.22.1. Exponential Cohesive Zone Material for Interface Elements ................................................. 105
3.22.2. Bilinear Cohesive Zone Material for Interface Elements ........................................................ 106
3.22.3. Cohesive Zone Material for Contact Elements ...................................................................... 106
3.23. Fluid Material Models .................................................................................................................. 108
3.24. User-Defined Material Model ....................................................................................................... 109
3.24.1. Using State Variables with UserMat .................................................................................... 109
3.25. Material Strength Limits .............................................................................................................. 110
3.26. Damage Initiation Criteria ........................................................................................................... 112
3.27. Damage Evolution Law ............................................................................................................... 113
4. Explicit Dynamics Materials ................................................................................................................ 115
5. Material Curve Fitting ......................................................................................................................... 117
5.1. Hyperelastic Material Curve Fitting ................................................................................................ 117
5.1.1. Understanding the Hyperelastic Material Curve-Fitting Process ............................................. 117
5.1.2. Step 1. Prepare Experimental Data ........................................................................................ 118
5.1.3. Step 2. Input the Experimental Data ...................................................................................... 119

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. v
ANSYS Mechanical APDL Material Reference

5.1.3.1. Batch ........................................................................................................................... 119

5.1.3.2. GUI .............................................................................................................................. 120
5.1.4. Step 3. Select a Material Model Option .................................................................................. 120
5.1.4.1. Batch Method .............................................................................................................. 121
5.1.4.2. GUI Method ................................................................................................................. 121
5.1.5. Step 4. Initialize the Coefficients ............................................................................................ 121
5.1.5.1. Batch ........................................................................................................................... 122
5.1.5.2. GUI .............................................................................................................................. 122
5.1.6. Step 5. Specify Control Parameters and Solve ........................................................................ 122
5.1.6.1. Batch ........................................................................................................................... 123
5.1.6.2. GUI .............................................................................................................................. 123
5.1.7. Step 6. Plot Your Experimental Data and Analyze ................................................................... 123
5.1.7.1. GUI .............................................................................................................................. 123
5.1.7.2. Review/Verify .............................................................................................................. 124
5.1.8. Step 7. Write Data to the TB Command .................................................................................. 124
5.1.8.1. Batch ........................................................................................................................... 124
5.1.8.2. GUI .............................................................................................................................. 124
5.2. Viscoelastic Material Curve Fitting ................................................................................................. 124
5.2.1. Understanding the Viscoelastic Material Curve-Fitting Process .............................................. 125
5.2.2. Step 1. Prepare Experimental Data ........................................................................................ 125
5.2.3. Step 2. Input the Data ........................................................................................................... 126
5.2.3.1. Batch ........................................................................................................................... 126
5.2.3.2. GUI .............................................................................................................................. 127
5.2.4. Step 3. Select a Material Model Option .................................................................................. 127
5.2.4.1. Batch Method .............................................................................................................. 127
5.2.4.2. GUI Method ................................................................................................................. 128
5.2.5. Step 4. Initialize the Coefficients ............................................................................................ 128
5.2.5.1. Batch Method ............................................................................................................. 129
5.2.5.2. GUI Method ................................................................................................................. 130
5.2.6. Step 5. Specify Control Parameters and Solve ........................................................................ 130
5.2.6.1. Temperature-Dependent Solutions Using the Shift Function ......................................... 130
5.2.6.2. Temperature-Dependent Solutions Without the Shift Function ..................................... 131
5.2.6.3. Batch Method .............................................................................................................. 132
5.2.6.4. GUI Method ................................................................................................................. 132
5.2.7. Step 6. Plot the Experimental Data and Analyze ..................................................................... 133
5.2.7.1. Analyze Your Curves for Proper Fit ................................................................................ 133
5.2.8. Step 7. Write Data to the TB Command .................................................................................. 133
5.2.8.1. Batch Method .............................................................................................................. 134
5.2.8.2. GUI Method ................................................................................................................. 134
5.3. Creep Material Curve Fitting .......................................................................................................... 134
5.3.1. Understanding the Creep Material Curve-Fitting Process ....................................................... 134
5.3.2. Step 1. Prepare Experimental Data ........................................................................................ 135
5.3.3. Step 2. Input the Experimental Data ...................................................................................... 136
5.3.3.1. Batch Method .............................................................................................................. 137
5.3.3.2. GUI Method ................................................................................................................. 137
5.3.4. Step 3. Select a Material Model Option .................................................................................. 137
5.3.4.1. Batch Method .............................................................................................................. 137
5.3.4.2. GUI Method ................................................................................................................. 138
5.3.5. Step 4. Initialize the Coefficients ............................................................................................ 138
5.3.5.1. Batch Method .............................................................................................................. 139
5.3.5.2. GUI Method ................................................................................................................. 140
5.3.6. Step 5. Specify Control Parameters and Solve ........................................................................ 140

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
vi of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 ANSYS Mechanical APDL Material Reference

5.3.6.1. Batch Method .............................................................................................................. 140

5.3.6.2. GUI Method ................................................................................................................. 140
5.3.7. Step 6. Plot the Experimental Data and Analyze ..................................................................... 140
5.3.7.1. GUI Method ................................................................................................................. 141
5.3.7.2. Analyze Your Curves for Proper Fit ................................................................................ 141
5.3.8. Step 7. Write Data to the TB Command .................................................................................. 141
5.3.8.1. Batch Method .............................................................................................................. 141
5.3.8.2. GUI Method ................................................................................................................. 141
5.3.9. Tips For Curve Fitting Creep Models ...................................................................................... 142
5.4. Chaboche Material Curve Fitting ................................................................................................... 143
5.4.1. Understanding the Chaboche Material Curve-Fitting Process ................................................ 143
5.4.2. Step 1. Prepare Experimental Data ........................................................................................ 144
5.4.3. Step 2. Input the Experimental Data ...................................................................................... 145
5.4.3.1. Batch Method .............................................................................................................. 145
5.4.3.2. GUI Method ................................................................................................................. 146
5.4.4. Step 3. Select a Material Model Option .................................................................................. 146
5.4.4.1. Batch Method .............................................................................................................. 146
5.4.4.2. GUI Method ................................................................................................................. 146
5.4.5. Step 4. Initialize the Coefficients ............................................................................................ 146
5.4.5.1. Batch Method .............................................................................................................. 147
5.4.5.2. GUI Method ................................................................................................................. 148
5.4.6. Step 5. Specify Control Parameters and Solve ........................................................................ 148
5.4.6.1. Temperature-Dependent Solutions .............................................................................. 148
5.4.6.2. Batch Method .............................................................................................................. 149
5.4.6.3. GUI Method ................................................................................................................. 149
5.4.7. Step 6. Plot the Experimental Data and Analyze ..................................................................... 149
5.4.7.1. Analyzing Your Curves for Proper Fit ............................................................................. 150
5.4.8. Step 7. Write Data to the TB Command .................................................................................. 150
6. Material Model Combinations ............................................................................................................ 151
7. Understanding Field Variable Interpolation ....................................................................................... 155
7.1. Data Processing ............................................................................................................................ 155
7.2. Example: One-Dimensional Interpolation ....................................................................................... 156
7.3. Example: Two-Dimensional Interpolation ....................................................................................... 157
8. GUI-Inaccessible Material Properties .................................................................................................. 159

List of Figures
3.1. Generalized Maxwell Solid in One Dimension ........................................................................................ 47
3.2. Sphere Discretization by 42 Microplanes ............................................................................................... 58
3.3. Damage Parameter d Depending on the Equivalent Strain Energy ......................................................... 60
3.4. Stress-strain Behavior at Uniaxial Tension .............................................................................................. 60
3.5. Pseudoelasticity (PE) and Shape Memory Effect (SME) ............................................................................ 89
3.6. Typical Superelasticity Behavior ............................................................................................................. 90
3.7. Idealized Stress-Strain Diagram of Superelastic Behavior ........................................................................ 91
3.8. Admissible Paths for Elastic Behavior and Phase Transformations ........................................................... 96

List of Tables
3.1. Linear Material Property Descriptions .................................................................................................... 15
3.2. Implicit Creep Equations ....................................................................................................................... 77

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. vii
ANSYS Mechanical APDL Material Reference

3.3. Superelastic Option Constants .............................................................................................................. 93

3.4. Shape Memory Effect Option Constants ................................................................................................ 96
5.1. Experimental Details for Case 1 and 2 Models and Blatz-Ko .................................................................. 118
5.2. Experimental Details for Case 3 Models ............................................................................................... 118
5.3. Hyperelastic Curve-Fitting Model Types ............................................................................................... 120
5.4. Viscoelastic Data Types and Abbreviations ........................................................................................... 125
5.5. Creep Data Types and Abbreviations ................................................................................................... 135
5.6. Creep Model and Data/Type Attribute ................................................................................................. 136
5.7. Creep Models and Abbreviations ......................................................................................................... 138
6.1. Material Model Combination Possibilities ............................................................................................ 151

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
viii of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 1: Introduction to Material Models
Material models (also called constitutive models), are the mathematical representation of a material's
response to an applied load.

Typical model classes include the relationships between stress-strain, heat flux-temperature gradient,
voltage-strain, and current-voltage, but also include more general behaviors such as friction and
bonding, and response due to changes in the physical environment such as thermal expansion and
swelling.

This reference provides information about material model behavior and application, including details
about the load-response relationship and the necessary information required to use the material models
in an analysis. The models are grouped based on the degrees of freedom that, directly or indirectly,
give the loading function that serves as the input for the material model.

The following related introductory topics are available:

1.1. Material Models for Displacement Applications
1.2. Material Models for Temperature Applications
1.3. Material Models for Electromagnetic Applications
1.4. Material Models for Coupled Applications
1.5. Material Parameters

1.1. Material Models for Displacement Applications

For analyses that include displacement degrees of freedom, the input is a function of deformation such
as strain or displacement, and the response is given force-like quantities such as stress or normal and
tangential forces. The following general material types are available:

Type Behavior Application

Linear elastic The response is the stresses that are directly pro- Many metals are linear elastic
portional to the strains and the material will fully at room temperature when
recover the original shape when unloaded. For the strains are small.
isotropic materials, the relationship is given by
Hooke's law and this relationship can be general-
ized to define anisotropic behavior.
Plastic and elast- The deformation of the material includes a per- Plastic deformation is ob-
ic-plastic manent, or plastic, component that will not return served in many materials
to the original configuration if the load is removed such as metals, alloys, soils,
and evolves in response to the deformation his- rocks, concrete, and ceramics.
tory.These materials also typically have an elastic
behavior so that the combined deformation in-
cludes a part that is recoverable upon unloading.
Hyperelastic The behavior of these models is defined by a Hyperelastic models are often
strain-energy potential, which is the energy stored used for materials that under-
in the material due to strain.The mathematical go large elastic deformation,

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1
Chapter 1: Introduction to Material Models

Type Behavior Application

formulation is convenient for large-deformation such as polymers and biolo-
analyses. gical materials.
Rate effects and This is a general behavior in which the response Metal alloys that show signi-
time depend- of the material depends on the rate of deforma- ficant creep deformation un-
ency tion, and thus also the time. Examples include der elevated temperature,
viscoelasticity, viscoplasticity, creep and damping. rate-dependent metal form-
ing applications, polymers
which typically get stiffer for
increased deformation rate,
and structures that damp out
high frequency waves under
dynamic loading.
Expansion and Materials often respond to changes in the physical Radiation environments,
swelling environment and this response affects the struc- bonded materials with
tural behavior. Examples include thermal expan- thermal strain mismatch, and
sion in which changes in material volume depend soils that absorb water.
on changes in temperature and swelling behavi-
ors that depend on hygroscopic effects or neutron
flux.
Interaction These models produce a response based on the Gasket and joint materials
interaction of structures. and also models of bonded
and separating surfaces
along interfaces or material
cleavage.
Shape memory An elastic constitutive model with an internal The phase transformation
alloy phase transformation. depends on the stress and
temperature that cause an
internal transformation
strain.

1.2. Material Models for Temperature Applications

For analyses that include temperature as a degree of freedom, the material model for conduction gives
a heat flux due to the gradient of temperature and also interaction between bodies due to radiative
heat transfer that is dependent on surface temperature differences.

1.3. Material Models for Electromagnetic Applications

Material models for use in analyses with electromagnetic degrees of freedom include:

Type Description
Magnetic Gives the magnetomotive force in response to the magnetic
flux.
Conductivity For electric and magnetic current conductivities that model
the relationship between the respective field and its flux.
Permittivity and Per- Gives the energy storage in a material in response to an
meability electromagnetic field.

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
2 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Material Parameters

Type Description
Loss Represents the energy lost in electromagnetic and dielectric
materials in response to changes in electromagnetic fields.

1.4. Material Models for Coupled Applications

Some models are valid in analyses that couple the thermal, electromagnetic, and displacement degrees
of freedom.

Although the models are coupled, they remain distinct and give the same load-response behavior.
However, the piezoelectric and piezoresistive materials are electromechanical coupled models that give
a strain in response to a voltage and also produce a voltage in response to straining.

1.5. Material Parameters

Because a material model represents a mathematical relationship between response and load, it requires
input parameters so that the model matches the material behavior.

In some cases, the parameters can be a function of physical field quantities such as temperature, fre-
quency or time or interaction quantities such as normal pressure, relative distance, or relative velocity.

Matching the model to the actual behavior can be challenging; therefore, some built-in curve-fitting
methods are available that use minimization to select a set of parameters that give a close fit to measured
material behavior. The curve-fitting methods help you to select material parameters for creep, hypere-
lastic, viscoelastic, and some plastic models.

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 3
 Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
4 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 2: Element Support for Material Models
Following is a list of available material models and the elements that support each material.

Material models are specified via the TB,Lab command, where Lab represents the material model label
(shortcut name).

Label Material Model Elements

(Lab)
AHYPER Anisotropic hypere- SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOL-
lasticity ID187, SHELL208, SHELL209, SOLID272, SOLID273, SHELL281,
SOLID285, PIPE288, PIPE289, ELBOW290
ANEL Anisotropic elasticity SOLID5, PLANE13, SOLID98, SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183,
SOLID185,SOLID186,SOLID187,SOLSH190,SHELL208,SHELL209,
PLANE223,SOLID226,SOLID227,SOLID272,SOLID273,SHELL281,
SOLID285, PIPE288, PIPE289, ELBOW290

Also, explicit dynamic elements SOLID164, SOLID168

ANISO Anisotropic plasticity SOLID62, SOLID65
BB Bergstrom-Boyce PLANE182, PLANE183, SHELL181, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOL-
ID187, SOLSH190, SHELL208, SHELL209, SOLID272, SOLID273,
SHELL281, SOLID285, PIPE288, PIPE289, ELBOW290
BH Magnetic SOLID5, PLANE13, PLANE53, SOLID62, SOLID96, SOLID97, SOL-
ID98, PLANE233, SOLID236, SOLID237
BISO Bilinear isotropic von Mises plasticity:
hardening
SOLID62, SOLID65, LINK180, SHELL181, SOLID185,
SOLID186, SOLID187, BEAM188, BEAM189,
SOLSH190, SHELL208, SHELL209, PLANE223,
SOLID226, SOLID227, REINF264, REINF265,
SHELL281, PIPE288, PIPE289, ELBOW290,
PLANE182, PLANE183
Also , explicit dynamic elements LINK160,
BEAM161, PLANE162, SHELL163, SOLID164, SOL-
ID168

Hill plasticity:

LINK180, SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185,

SOLID186, SOLID187, BEAM188, BEAM189, SOLSH190,
SHELL208, SHELL209, PLANE223, SOLID226, SOLID227,
REINF264, REINF265, SOLID272, SOLID273, SHELL281,
SOLID285, PIPE288, PIPE289, ELBOW290

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 5
Chapter 2: Element Support for Material Models

Label Material Model Elements

(Lab)
BKIN Bilinear kinematic von Mises plasticity:
hardening
SOLID62, SOLID65, LINK180, SHELL181, SOLID185,
SOLID186, SOLID187, BEAM188, BEAM189,
SOLSH190, SHELL208, SHELL209, PLANE223,
SOLID226, SOLID227, REINF264, REINF265,
SHELL281, PIPE288, PIPE289, ELBOW290,
PLANE182, PLANE183
Also , explicit dynamic elements LINK160,
BEAM161, PLANE162, SHELL163, SOLID164, SOL-
ID168

Hill plasticity:

LINK180, SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOL-

ID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, BEAM188, BEAM189,
SOLSH190, SHELL208, SHELL209, PLANE223,
SOLID226, SOLID227, REINF264, REINF265, SOL-
ID272, SOLID273, SHELL281, SOLID285, PIPE288,
PIPE289, ELBOW290
CAST Cast iron PLANE182 (not applicable for plane stress), PLANE183 (not ap-
plicable for plane stress), SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187,
SOLSH190, PLANE223, SOLID226, SOLID227, SOLID272, SOL-
ID273, SOLID285, PIPE288, PIPE289
CDM Mullins effect SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOL-
ID187, SOLSH190, SHELL208, SHELL209, SOLID272, SOLID273,
SHELL281, SOLID285, PIPE288, PIPE289, ELBOW290
CGCR Crack growth frac- PLANE182, SOLID185
ture criterion
CHABOCHE Chaboche nonlinear von Mises or Hill plasticity:
kinematic hardening
LINK180, SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOL-
ID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, BEAM188, BEAM189,
SOLSH190, SHELL208, SHELL209, PLANE223,
SOLID226, SOLID227, REINF264, REINF265, SOL-
ID272, SOLID273, SHELL281, SOLID285, PIPE288,
PIPE289, ELBOW290
CNDE Anisotropic electric HF119, HF120
current conductivity
CNDM Anisotropic magnet- HF119, HF120
ic current conductiv-
ity
COMP Composite damage Explicit dynamic elements PLANE162, SHELL163, SOLID164,
SOLID168
CONCR Concrete or concrete SOLID65
damage
Also, concrete damage model using explicit dynamic
elements SOLID164, SOLID168

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
6 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Label Material Model Elements
(Lab)
CREEP Creep Implicit creep with von Mises or Hill potential:

LINK180, SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOL-

ID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, BEAM188, BEAM189,
SOLSH190, SHELL208, SHELL209, PLANE223,
SOLID226, SOLID227, REINF264, REINF265, SOL-
ID272, SOLID273, SOLID285, SHELL281, PIPE288,
PIPE289, ELBOW290

Explicit creep with von Mises potential:

SOLID62, SOLID65
CZM Cohesive zone CONTA171, CONTA172, CONTA173, CONTA174, CONTA175,
CONTA176,CONTA177,INTER202,INTER203,INTER204,INTER205
DISCRETE Explicit spring- COMBI165
damper (discrete)
DMGE Damage evolution Progressive damage evolution (MPDG option):
law
LINK180, SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOL-
ID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, BEAM188, BEAM189,
SOLSH190, SHELL208, SHELL209, SOLID272,
SOLID273, SHELL281, SOLID285, PIPE288,
PIPE289, ELBOW290

Continuum damage mechanics (CDM option):

SHELL181, PLANE182 (plane stress option),

PLANE183 (plane stress option), SHELL208,
SHELL209, SHELL281, PIPE288 (thin pipe formu-
lation), PIPE289 (thin pipe formulation), EL-
BOW290
DMGI Damage initiation LINK180,SHELL181,PLANE182,PLANE183,SOLID185,SOLID186,
criteria SOLID187,BEAM188,BEAM189,SOLSH190,SHELL208,SHELL209,
SOLID272, SOLID273, SHELL281, SOLID285, PIPE288, PIPE289,
ELBOW290
DP Drucker-Prager plasti- SOLID62, SOLID65, PLANE83
city
DPER Anisotropic electric HF118, HF119, HF120, PLANE223, SOLID226, SOLID227
permittivity
EDP Extended Drucker- PLANE182 (not applicable for plane stress), PLANE183 (not ap-
Prager plicable for plane stress), SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187,
SOLSH190, PLANE223, SOLID226, SOLID227, SOLID272, SOL-
ID273, SOLID285, PIPE288, PIPE289
ELASTIC Elasticity LINK180,SHELL181,PLANE182,PLANE183,SOLID185,SOLID186,
SOLID187,BEAM188,BEAM189,SOLSH190,SHELL208,SHELL209,
CPT212,CPT213,CPT215,CPT216,CPT217,PLANE223,SOLID226,
SOLID227,REINF264,REINF265,SOLID272,SOLID273,SHELL281,
SOLID285, PIPE288, PIPE289, ELBOW290

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 7
Chapter 2: Element Support for Material Models

Label Material Model Elements

(Lab)
EOS Equation of state Explicit dynamic elements only
EVISC Viscoelasticity Explicit dynamic elements BEAM161, PLANE162, SOLID164,
SOLID168
EXPE Experimental data Used only with other material models
FCON Fluid conductance FLUID116
data
FCLI Failure criteria mater- All structural elements
ial strength limits
FLUID Fluid HSFLD241, HSFLD242
FOAM Foam Explicit dynamic elements PLANE162, SOLID164, SOLID168
FRIC Coefficient of friction CONTA171, CONTA172, CONTA173, CONTA174, CONTA175,
CONTA176, CONTA177, CONTA178
GASKET Gasket INTER192, INTER193, INTER194, INTER195
GCAP Geological cap Explicit dynamic elements SOLID164, SOLID168
GURSON Gurson pressure-de- PLANE182 (not applicable for plane stress), PLANE183 (not ap-
pendent plasticity plicable for plane stress), SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187,
SOLSH190, PLANE223, SOLID226, SOLID227, SOLID272, SOL-
ID273, SOLID285
HFFDLD Frequency-depend- HF119, HF120
ent lossy dielectric
HFLM Film coefficient data FLUID116
HILL Hill anisotropy LINK180,SHELL181,PLANE182,PLANE183,SOLID185,SOLID186,
SOLID187,BEAM188,BEAM189,SOLSH190,SHELL208,SHELL209,
PLANE223,SOLID226,SOLID227,REINF264,REINF265,SOLID272,
SOLID273, SHELL281, SOLID285, PIPE288, PIPE289, ELBOW290
HONEY Honeycomb Explicit dynamic elements PLANE162, SOLID164, SOLID168
HYPER Hyperelasticity SHELL181, PIPE288, PIPE289, ELBOW290, PLANE182, PLANE183,
SOLID185,SOLID186,SOLID187,SOLSH190,SHELL208,SHELL209,
SOLID272, SOLID273, SHELL281, SOLID285
JOIN Joint (linear and MPC184
nonlinear elastic
stiffness, linear and
nonlinear damping,
and frictional behavi-
or)
KINH Multilinear kinematic von Mises plasticity:
hardening
PLANE13, SOLID62, LINK180, SHELL181,
PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186,
SOLID187, BEAM188, BEAM189, SOLSH190,
SHELL208, SHELL209, PLANE223, SOLID226,
SOLID227, REINF264, REINF265, SHELL281,
PIPE288, PIPE289, ELBOW290

Hill plasticity:

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
8 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Label Material Model Elements
(Lab)
LINK180, SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOL-
ID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, BEAM188, BEAM189,
SOLSH190, SHELL208, SHELL209, PLANE223,
SOLID226, SOLID227, REINF264, REINF265, SOL-
ID272, SOLID273, SHELL281, SOLID285, EL-
BOW290
LSEM Anisotropic electric HF119, HF120
and magnetic loss
tangents
MELAS Multilinear elasticity SOLID62, SOLID65
MISO Multilinear isotropic von Mises plasticity:
hardening
SOLID62, SOLID65, LINK180, SHELL181,PLANE182,
PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187,
BEAM188, BEAM189, SOLSH190, SHELL208,
SHELL209, PLANE223, SOLID226, SOLID227, RE-
INF264, REINF265, SOLID272, SOLID273,
SHELL281, SOLID285, PIPE288, PIPE289, EL-
BOW290

Hill plasticity:

LINK180, SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOL-

ID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, BEAM188, BEAM189,
SOLSH190, SHELL208, SHELL209, PLANE223,
SOLID226, SOLID227, REINF264, REINF265, SOL-
ID272, SOLID273, SHELL281, SOLID285, EL-
BOW290
MKIN Multilinear kinematic von Mises plasticity:
hardening
SOLID62, SOLID65, LINK180, SHELL181,
PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186,
SOLID187, BEAM188, BEAM189, SOLSH190,
SHELL208, SHELL209, PLANE223, SOLID226,
SOLID227, REINF264, REINF265, SOLID272, SOL-
ID273, SHELL281, SOLID285, PIPE288, PIPE289,
ELBOW290

Hill plasticity:

LINK180, SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOL-

ID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, BEAM188, BEAM189,
SOLSH190, SHELL208, SHELL209, PLANE223,
SOLID226, SOLID227, REINF264, REINF265, SOL-
ID272, SOLID273, SHELL281, SOLID285, EL-
BOW290
MOONEY Mooney-Rivlin hyper- Explicit dynamic elements PLANE162, SHELL163, SOLID164,
elasticity SOLID168

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 9
Chapter 2: Element Support for Material Models

Label Material Model Elements

(Lab)
MPLANE Microplane PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187

Can be used with reinforcing elements REINF264 and

REINF265 to model reinforced concrete.
MUR Anisotropic relative HF118, HF119, HF120
permeability
NLISO Voce isotropic von Mises or Hill plasticity:
hardening law
LINK180, SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOL-
ID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, BEAM188, BEAM189,
SOLSH190, SHELL208, SHELL209, PLANE223,
SOLID226, SOLID227, REINF264, REINF265, SOL-
ID272, SOLID273, SHELL281, SOLID285, PIPE288,
PIPE289, ELBOW290
PIEZ Piezoelectric matrix SOLID5, PLANE13, SOLID98, PLANE223, SOLID226, SOL-
ID227
PLASTIC Plasticity LINK180, SHELL181, PIPE288, PIPE289, ELBOW290, PLANE182,
PLANE183,SOLID185,SOLID186,SOLID187,BEAM188,BEAM189,
SOLSH190, SHELL208, SHELL209, PLANE223, SOLID226, SOL-
ID227, REINF264, REINF265, SOLID272, SOLID273, SHELL281,
SOLID285
PLAW Plasticity laws Explicit dynamic elements LINK160, BEAM161, PLANE162,
SHELL163, SOLID164, SOLID168
PM Porous media CPT212, CPT213, CPT215, CPT216, CPT217
PRONY Prony seriescon- LINK180, SHELL181, PIPE288, PIPE289, ELBOW290, PLANE182,
stants for viscoelastic PLANE183,SOLID185,SOLID186,SOLID187,BEAM188,BEAM189,
materials SOLSH190, SHELL208, SHELL209, PLANE223, SOLID226, SOL-
ID227, REINF264, REINF265, SOLID272, SOLID273, SHELL281,
SOLID285
PZRS Piezoresistivity PLANE223, SOLID226, SOLID227
RATE Rate-dependent LINK180,SHELL181,PLANE182,PLANE183,SOLID185,SOLID186,
plasticity (viscoplasti- SOLID187,BEAM188,BEAM189,SOLSH190,SHELL208,SHELL209,
city) PLANE223,SOLID226,SOLID227,REINF264,REINF265,SOLID272,
SOLID273, SHELL281, SOLID285, PIPE288, PIPE289, ELBOW290

Anand unified plasticity option:

PLANE182 (not applicable for plane stress),

PLANE183 (not applicable for plane stress), SOL-
ID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLSH190, SOL-
ID272, SOLID273, SOLID285, PIPE288, PIPE289
SDAMP Material structural SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOL-
damping ID187, SOLSH190, SHELL208, SHELL209, PLANE223, SOLID226,
SOLID227, SOLID272, SOLID273, SHELL281, SOLID285, EL-
BOW290
SHIFT Shift function for vis- LINK180,SHELL181,PLANE182,PLANE183,SOLID185,SOLID186,
coelastic materials SOLID187,BEAM188,BEAM189,SOLSH190,SHELL208,SHELL209,

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
10 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Label Material Model Elements
(Lab)
PLANE223, SOLID226, SOLID227, PIPE288, PIPE289, ELBOW290,
REINF264, REINF265, SOLID272, SOLID273, SHELL281, SOLID285
SMA Shape memory alloy PLANE182, PLANE183, PLANE223 (with plane strain or axisym-
metric stress states),SOLID185,SOLID186,SOLID187,SOLSH190,
SOLID226, SOLID227, SOLID272, SOLID273, SOLID285
STATE State variables (user- LINK180,SHELL181,PLANE182,PLANE183,SOLID185,SOLID186,
defined) SOLID187,BEAM188,BEAM189,SOLSH190,SHELL208,SHELL209,
REINF264,REINF265,SOLID272,SOLID273,SHELL281,SOLID285,
PIPE288, PIPE289, ELBOW290

Also, user-defined plasticity or viscoplasticity: SOLID62,

SOLID65, PLANE183
SWELL Swelling SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOL-
ID187, BEAM188, SOLSH190, SHELL208, SHELL209, REINF264,
REINF265, SOLID272, SOLID273, SHELL281, SOLID285, PIPE288,
PIPE289, ELBOW290
UNIAXIAL Uniaxial stress-strain PLANE182, PLANE183, PLANE223 (not applicable for plane
relation stress), SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLSH190, SOLID226,
SOLID227, SOLID272, SOLID273, SOLID285
USER User-defined LINK180,SHELL181,PLANE182,PLANE183,SOLID185,SOLID186,
SOLID187,BEAM188,BEAM189,SOLSH190,SHELL208,SHELL209,
REINF264,REINF265,SOLID272,SOLID273,SHELL281,SOLID285,
PIPE288, PIPE289, ELBOW290

Also, user-defined plasticity or viscoplasticity: SOLID62,

SOLID65, PLANE183

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 11
 Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
12 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 3: Material Models
This document describes all material models available for implicit analysis, including information about
material data table input (TB). The following material model topics are available:
3.1. Understanding Material Data Tables
3.2. Experimental Data
3.3. Linear Material Properties
3.4. Plasticity Models
3.5. Hyperelastic Material Models
3.6. Viscoelastic Material Model
3.7. Microplane Material Model
3.8. Porous Media
3.9. Magnetic Material Model
3.10. High-Frequency Electromagnetic Material Models
3.11. Anisotropic Elastic Material Model
3.12. Piezoelectric Material Model
3.13. Piezoresistive Material Model
3.14. Anisotropic Electric Permittivity Material Model
3.15. Rate-Dependent Plastic (Viscoplastic) Material Models
3.16. Gasket Material Model
3.17. Creep Equations
3.18. Swelling Model
3.19. Shape Memory Alloy (SMA) Material Model
3.20. MPC184 Joint Material Models
3.21. Contact Friction
3.22. Cohesive Zone Material Model
3.23. Fluid Material Models
3.24. User-Defined Material Model
3.25. Material Strength Limits
3.26. Damage Initiation Criteria
3.27. Damage Evolution Law

For a list of the elements that support each material model, see "Element Support for Material Models".

For related information, see "Nonlinear Structural Analysis" in the Structural Analysis Guide.

For information about explicit dynamics material models, including detailed data table input, see Ma-
terial Models in the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide.

3.1. Understanding Material Data Tables

A material data table is a series of constants that are interpreted when they are used. Data tables are
always associated with a material number and are most often used to define nonlinear material data
(stress-strain curves, creep constants, swelling constants, and magnetization curves). Other material
properties are described in Linear Material Properties (p. 14).

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 13
Chapter 3: Material Models

For some element types, the data table is used for special element input data other than material
properties. The form of the data table (referred to as the TB table) depends upon the data being defined:

• Where the form is peculiar to only one element type, the table is described with the element in "Element
Library".
• If the form applies to more than one element, it is described here and referenced in the element de-
scription.

3.2. Experimental Data

The experimental data table option (TB,EXPE) allows you to input experimental data. The data is used
with other material models.

Initiate the experimental data table, then specify the appropriate experimental data type (TBOPT), as
follows:

UNIAXIAL - Uniaxial experimental data

BIAXIAL - Equibiaxial experimental data
SHEAR - Pure shear experimental data, also known as planar tension
VOLUMETRIC - Volumetric experimental data
SSHEAR - Simple shear experimental data
UNITENSION - Uniaxial tension experimental data
UNICOMPRESSION - Uniaxial compression experimental data
GMODULUS - Shear modulus experimental data
KMODULUS - Bulk modulus experimental data
EMODULUS - Tensile modulus experimental data
NUXY - Poisson's ratio experimental data

Enter the data (TBPT) for each data point. Each data point entered consists of the independent variable
followed by one or more dependent variables. The specific definition of the input points depends on
the requirements of the material model associated with the experimental data.

You can also define experimental data as a function of field variables. Field-dependent data are entered
by preceding a set of experimental data (TBFIELD) to define the value of the field.

3.3. Linear Material Properties

Material properties (which may be functions of temperature) are described as linear properties because
typical non-thermal analyses with these properties require only a single iteration.

Conversely, if properties needed for a thermal analysis (such as KXX) are temperature-dependent, the
problem is nonlinear. Properties such as stress-strain data are described as nonlinear properties because
an analysis with these properties requires an iterative solution.

Linear material properties that are required for an element, but which are not defined, use default values.
(The exception is that EX and KXX must be input with a nonzero value where applicable.) Any additional
material properties are ignored.

The X, Y, and Z portions of the material property labels refer to the element coordinate system. In
general, if a material is isotropic, only the “X” and possibly the “XY” term is input.

To define the material properties for an element, issue the MP command.

The following topics concerning linear material properties are available:

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
14 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Linear Material Properties

3.3.1. Defining Linear Material Properties

3.3.2. Stress-Strain Relationships
3.3.3. Damping
3.3.4.Thermal Expansion
3.3.5. Emissivity
3.3.6. Specific Heat
3.3.7. Film Coefficients
3.3.8.Temperature Dependency
3.3.9. How Material Properties Are Evaluated

3.3.1. Defining Linear Material Properties

The linear material properties used by the element type are listed under "Material Properties" in the
input table for each element type. The following table describes all available linear material properties,
defined via the Lab value on the MP command:

Table 3.1 Linear Material Property Descriptions

MP,
Lab Units Description
Value
EX Elastic modulus, element x direction
EY Force/Area Elastic modulus, element y direction
EZ Elastic modulus, element z direction
PRXY Major Poisson's ratio, x-y plane
PRYZ Major Poisson's ratio, y-z plane
PRXZ Major Poisson's ratio, x-z plane
None
NUXY Minor Poisson's ratio, x-y plane
NUYZ Minor Poisson's ratio, y-z plane
NUXZ Minor Poisson's ratio, x-z plane
GXY Shear modulus, x-y plane
GYZ Force/Area Shear modulus, y-z plane
GXZ Shear modulus, x-z plane
ALPX Secant coefficient of thermal expansion, element x direction
ALPY Strain/Temp Secant coefficient of thermal expansion, element y direction
ALPZ Secant coefficient of thermal expansion, element z direction
Instantaneous coefficient of thermal expansion, element x
CTEX
direction
Instantaneous coefficient of thermal expansion, element y
CTEY Strain/Temp
direction
Instantaneous coefficient of thermal expansion, element z
CTEZ
direction
THSX Thermal strain, element x direction
THSY Strain Thermal strain, element y direction
THSZ Thermal strain, element z direction

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 15
Chapter 3: Material Models

MP,
Lab Units Description
Value
REFT Temp Reference temperature (as a property) (see also TREF)
Coefficient of friction (or, for FLUID29 and FLUID30 ele-
MU None
ments, boundary admittance)
ALPD None Mass matrix multiplier for damping (also see ALPHAD)
BETD None Stiffness matrix multiplier for damping (also see BETAD)
DMPR None Constant material damping coefficient
DENS Mass/Vol Mass density
KXX Thermal conductivity, element x direction
Heat*Length/
KYY Thermal conductivity, element y direction
(Time*Area*Temp)
KZZ Thermal conductivity, element z direction
C Heat/Mass*Temp Specific heat
ENTH Heat/Vol Enthalpy ( DENS*C d(Temp))
Heat /
HF Convection (or film) coefficient
(Time*Area*Temp)
EMIS None Emissivity
Heat/Time Heat generation rate for thermal mass element MASS71
QRATE Fraction of plastic work converted to heat (Taylor-Quinney
None coefficient) for coupled-field elements PLANE223, SOLID226,
and SOLID227
VISC Force*Time/ Length2 Viscosity
Sonic velocity (FLUID29, FLUID30, FLUID129, and FLUID130
SONC Length/Time
elements only)
MURX Magnetic relative permeability, element x direction
MURY None Magnetic relative permeability, element y direction
MURZ Magnetic relative permeability, element z direction
MGXX Magnetic coercive force, element x direction
MGYY Current/Length Magnetic coercive force, element y direction
MGZZ Magnetic coercive force, element z direction
RSVX Electrical resistivity, element x direction
RSVY Resistance*Area/Length Electrical resistivity, element y direction
RSVZ Electrical resistivity, element z direction
PERX Electric relative permittivity, element x direction
PERY None Electric relative permittivity, element y direction
PERZ Electric relative permittivity, element z direction
LSST None Dielectric loss tangent
SBKX Seebeck coefficient, element x direction
SBKY Voltage/Temp Seebeck coefficient, element y direction
SBKZ Seebeck coefficient, element z direction

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
16 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Linear Material Properties

MP,
Lab Units Description
Value
DXX Diffusion coefficient, element x direction
2
DYY Length /Time Diffusion coefficient, element y direction
DZZ Diffusion coefficient, element z direction
3
CREF Mass/Length Saturated concentration
3
CSAT Mass/Length Reference concentration
BETX Coefficient of diffusion expansion, element x direction
3
BETY Length /Mass Coefficient of diffusion expansion, element y direction
BETZ Coefficient of diffusion expansion, element z direction

3.3.2. Stress-Strain Relationships

Structural material properties must be input as an isotropic, orthotropic, or anisotropic material.

If the material is isotropic:

Young's modulus (EX) must be input.

Poisson's ratio (PRXY or NUXY) defaults to 0.3. If a zero value is desired, input PRXY or
NUXY with a zero or blank value. Poisson's ratio should not be ≥ 0.5 nor ≤ -1.0.

The shear modulus (GXY) defaults to EX/(2(1+NUXY)). If GXY is input, it must match EX/(2
(1+NUXY)). The sole purpose for inputting GXY is to ensure consistency with the other
two properties.

If the material is orthotropic:

EX, EY, EZ, (PRXY, PRYZ, PRXZ, or NUXY, NUYZ, NUXZ), GXY, GYZ, and GXZ must all be
input if the element type uses the material property. There are no defaults. For example,
if only EX and EY are input (with different values) to a plane stress element, The program
generates an error message indicating that the material is orthotropic and that GXY and
NUXY are also needed.

Poisson's ratio may be input in either major (PRXY, PRYZ, PRXZ) or minor (NUXY, NUYZ,
NUXZ) form, but not both for a particular material. The major form is converted to the
minor form during the solve operation (SOLVE). Solution output is in terms of the minor
form, regardless of how the data was input. If zero values are desired, input the labels
with a zero (or blank) value.

For axisymmetric analyses, the X, Y, and Z labels refer to the radial (R), axial (Z), and
hoop (θ) directions, respectively. Orthotropic properties given in the R, Z, θ system should
be input as follows: EX = ER, EY = EZ, and EZ = E θ. An additional transformation is re-
quired for Poisson's ratios. If the given R, Z, θ properties are column-normalized (see the
Mechanical APDL Theory Reference), NUXY = NURZ, NUYZ = NUZ θ = (ET/EZ) *NU θZ, and
NUXZ = NUR θ. If the given R, Z, θ properties are row-normalized, NUXY = (EZ/ER)*NURZ,
NUYZ = (E θ/EZ)*NUZ θ = NU θZ, and NUXZ = (E θ/ER)*NUR θ.

For all other orthotropic material properties (including ALPX, ALPY, and ALPZ), the X, Y,
and Z part of the label (as in KXX, KYY, and KZZ) refers to the direction (in the element

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 17
Chapter 3: Material Models

coordinate system) in which that particular property acts. The Y and Z directions of the
properties default to the X direction (for example, KYY and KZZ default to KXX) to reduce
the amount of input required.

If the material is anisotropic:

See Anisotropic Elastic Material Model (p. 69).

3.3.3. Damping
Material dependent mass and stiffness damping (MP,ALPD and MP,BETD) is an additional method of
including damping for dynamic analyses and is useful when different parts of the model have different
damping values.

ALPD and BETD are not assumed to be temperature dependent and are always evaluated at T = 0.0.
Special-purpose elements, such as MATRIX27 and FLUID29, generally do not require damping. However,
if material property ALPD and BETD are specified for these elements, the value will be used to create
the damping matrix at solution time.

Constant material damping coefficient (DMPR) is a material-dependent structural damping coefficient

that is constant with respect to the excitation frequency in harmonic analysis and is useful when different
parts of the model have different damping values (see Damping Matrices in the Mechanical APDL Theory
Reference). DMPR is not temperature dependent and is always evaluated at T = 0.0.

See Damping Matrices in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about the damping
formulation.

See Damping in the Structural Analysis Guide for more information about DMPR.

3.3.4. Thermal Expansion

The uniform temperature does not default to REFT (but does default to TREF on the TREF command).

The effects of thermal expansion can be accounted for in three different (and mutually exclusive) ways:

• secant coefficient of thermal expansion (ALPX, ALPY, ALPZ)

• instantaneous coefficient of thermal expansion (CTEX, CTEY, CTEZ)
• thermal strain (THSX, THSY, THSZ)

When you use ALPX to enter values for the secant coefficient of thermal expansion (αse), the program
interprets those values as secant or mean values, taken with respect to some common datum or defin-
ition temperature. For instance, suppose you measured thermal strains in a test laboratory, starting at
23°C, and took readings at 200°, 400°, 600°, 800°, and 1000°. When you plot this strain-temperature
data, you could input this directly using THSX. The slopes of the secants to the strain-temperature curve
would be the mean (or secant) values of the coefficient of thermal expansion, defined with respect to
the common temperature of 23° (To). You can also input the instantaneous coefficient of thermal expan-
sion (αin, using CTEX). The slopes of the tangents to this curve represent the instantaneous values.
Hence, the figure below shows how the alternate ways of inputting coefficients of thermal expansion
relate to each other.

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
18 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Linear Material Properties

εth

αin

αse

To Tn T

The program calculates structural thermal strain as follows:

εth = αse(T) * (T - TREF)

where:

T = element evaluation temperature

TREF = temperature at which zero thermal strains exist (TREF command or REFT )
αse(T) = secant coefficient of thermal expansion, with respect to a definition temperature (in
this case, same as TREF) (ALPX )

If the material property data is in terms of instantaneous values of α, then the program will convert
those instantaneous values into secant values as follows:



∫α

α
 = 
 −

where:

Tn = temperature at which an αse value is being evaluated

To = definition temperature at which the αse values are defined (in this case, same as TREF)
αin(T) = instantaneous coefficient of thermal expansion at temperature T (CTEX )

If the material property data is in terms of thermal strain, the program will convert those strains into
secant values of coefficients of thermal expansion as follows:

ε

α =
− rf

where:

εith(T) = thermal strain at temperature T (THSX)

If necessary, the data is shifted so that the thermal strain is zero when Tn = Tref. If a data point at Tref
exists, a discontinuity in αse may be generated at Tn = Tref. This can be avoided by ensuring that the
slopes of εith on both sides of Tref match.

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 19
Chapter 3: Material Models

If the αse values are based upon a definition temperature other than TREF, then you need to convert
those values to TREF. This can be done using the MPAMOD command. Also see the Mechanical APDL
Theory Reference.

3.3.5. Emissivity
EMIS defaults to 1.0 if not defined. However, if EMIS is set to zero or blank, EMIS is taken to be 0.0.

3.3.6. Specific Heat

You can input specific heat effects using either the C (specific heat) or ENTH (enthalpy) property. Enthalpy
has units of heat/volume and is the integral of C x DENS over temperature. If both C and ENTH are
specified, the program uses ENTH. ENTH should be used only in a transient thermal analysis. For phase-
change problems, you must input ENTH as a function of temperature using the MP family of commands
(MP, MPTEMP, MPTGEN, and MPDATA).

3.3.7. Film Coefficients

Film coefficients are evaluated as described via the SF command. See the Mechanical APDL Theory Ref-
erence for additional details. Property evaluation at element temperatures beyond the supplied tabular
range assumes a constant property at the extreme range value. An exception occurs for the ENTH
property, which continues along the last supplied slope.

3.3.8. Temperature Dependency

Temperature-dependent properties may be input in tabular form (value vs. temperature [MP]) or as a
fourth-order polynomial (value = f(temperature) [MPTEMP and MPDATA]). If input as a polynomial, the
program evaluates the dependencies at discrete temperature points during PREP7 preprocessing and
then converts the properties to tabular form. The tabular properties are then available to the elements.

3.3.9. How Material Properties Are Evaluated

Material properties are evaluated at or near the centroid of the element or at each of the integration
points, as follows:

• Heat-transfer elements: All properties are evaluated at the centroid (except for the specific heat or
enthalpy, which is evaluated at the integration points).
• Structural elements: All properties are evaluated at the integration points.
• All other elements: All properties are evaluated at the centroid.

If the temperature of the centroid or integration point falls below or rises above the defined temperature
range of tabular data, ANSYS assumes the defined extreme minimum or maximum value, respectively,
for the material property outside the defined range.

3.4. Plasticity Models

Options are available for rate-independent plasticity, rate-dependent plasticity, and elasticity. A user-
defined material model option is also available.

For a list of the elements that support this material model, see "Element Support for Material Models".

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
20 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Plasticity Models

Select the material behavior option via menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Material Props> Ma-
terial Models, or via a TB,Lab command, as follows:

Lab value Material Behavior Option

BKIN Bilinear Kinematic Hardening (rate-independent
plasticity)
MKIN Multilinear Kinematic Hardening (rate-independ-
ent plasticity)
KINH Multilinear Kinematic Hardening (rate-independ-
ent plasticity)
CHABOCHE Chaboche Nonlinear Kinematic Hardening (rate-
independent plasticity)
MISO Multilinear Isotropic Hardening (rate-independent
plasticity)
BISO Bilinear Isotropic Hardening (rate-independent
plasticity)
NLISO Nonlinear Isotropic Hardening (rate-independent
plasticity)
ANISO Anisotropic (rate-independent plasticity)
HILL Hill Anisotropic Potential
DP Drucker-Prager (rate-independent plasticity)
EDP Extended Drucker-Prager
GURSON Gurson Plasticity and Damage
MELAS Multilinear Elastic
CAST Cast Iron Plasticity
PM Porous media
USER User-defined materials

Most options require a uniaxial stress-strain curve to be input. The exceptions are CHABOCHE, NLISO,
HILL, DP, and USER.

Most options must have elastically isotropic (EX = EY = EZ) materials. The exceptions are HILL, ANISO,
and USER.

Required values not included in the data table are assumed to be zero. If the data table is not defined
(or contains all zero values), the material is assumed to be linear.

The material behavior options are described below. See the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more
detail.
3.4.1. Bilinear Kinematic Hardening
3.4.2. Multilinear Kinematic Hardening
3.4.3. Nonlinear Kinematic Hardening
3.4.4. Bilinear Isotropic Hardening
3.4.5. Multilinear Isotropic Hardening
3.4.6. Nonlinear Isotropic Hardening
3.4.7. Anisotropic
3.4.8. Hill's Anisotropy
3.4.9. Drucker-Prager

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 21
Chapter 3: Material Models

3.4.10. Extended Drucker-Prager

3.4.11. EDP Cap Material
3.4.12. Gurson's Model
3.4.13. Multilinear Elastic
3.4.14. Cast Iron Plasticity Material

3.4.1. Bilinear Kinematic Hardening

This option (BKIN) assumes the total stress range is equal to twice the yield stress, so that the Bauschinger
effect is included. BKIN may be used for materials that obey von Mises yield criteria (which includes
most metals). The material behavior is described by a bilinear total stress-total strain curve starting at
the origin and with positive stress and strain values. The initial slope of the curve is taken as the elastic
modulus of the material. At the specified yield stress (C1), the curve continues along the second slope
defined by the tangent modulus, C2 (having the same units as the elastic modulus). The tangent mod-
ulus cannot be less than zero nor greater than the elastic modulus.

Initialize the stress-strain table with TB,BKIN. For each stress-strain curve, define the temperature (TB-
TEMP), then define C1 and C2 (TBDATA). You can define up to six temperature-dependent stress-strain
curves (NTEMP = 6 maximum on the TB command) in this manner. The constants C1 and C2 are:

Constant Meaning Property

C1 Force/Area Yield stress
C2 Force/Area Tangent modu-
lus

BKIN can be used with the TBOPT option. In this case, TBOPT takes two arguments. For TB,BKIN,,,,0,
there is no stress relaxation with an increase in temperature. This option is not recommended for non-
isothermal problems. For TB,BKIN,,,,1, Rice's hardening rule is applied (which does take stress relaxation
with temperature increase into account). This is the default.

See Plastic Material Options in the Structural Analysis Guide for more information on this material option.

You can combine this option with other material options to simulate more complex material behaviors.
See Material Model Combinations (p. 151) for further information.

3.4.2. Multilinear Kinematic Hardening

You can use either TB,KINH (alternately TB,PLASTIC,,,,KINH), or TB,MKIN to model metal plasticity beha-
vior under cyclic loading.

The two options use the Besseling model (see the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference), also called the
sublayer or overlay model. The material response is represented by multiple layers of perfectly plastic
material; the total response is obtained by weighted average behavior of all the layers. Individual weights
are derived from the uniaxial stress-strain curve. The uniaxial behavior is described by a piece-wise linear
"total stress-total strain curve", starting at the origin, with positive stress and strain values. The slope
of the first segment of the curve must correspond to the elastic modulus of the material and no segment
slope should be larger. The slope of the stress-strain curve is assumed to be zero beyond the last user-
defined stress-strain data point. In the following, the option TB,KINH is described first, followed by that
of TB,MKIN.

The KINH option is recommended because layers are scaled (Rice's model), providing better represent-
ations. The KINH option allows you to define up to 40 temperature-dependent stress-strain curves. If
you define more than one stress-strain curve for temperature-dependent properties, then each curve

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
22 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Plasticity Models

should contain the same number of points (up to a maximum of 20 points in each curve). The assumption
is that the corresponding points on the different stress-strain curves represent the temperature dependent
yield behavior of a particular sublayer.

For stress vs. total strain input, initialize the stress-strain table with TB,KINH. For stress vs. plastic strain
input, initialize the stress-strain table with either TB,KINH,,,,PLASTIC or TB,PLASTIC,,,,KINH. Input the
temperature of the first curve with the TBTEMP, then input stress and strain values using the TBPT.
Input the remaining temperatures and stress-strain values using the same sequence (TBTEMP followed
by TBPT).

See Plastic Material Options in the Structural Analysis Guide for more information on this material option.

You can combine this option with other material options to simulate more complex material behaviors.
See Material Model Combinations (p. 151) for further information.

The curve defined with the MKIN option is continuous from the origin with a maximum of five total
stress-total strain points. The slope of the first segment of the curve must correspond to the elastic
modulus of the material and no segment slope should be larger.

The MKIN option has the following restrictions:

• You may define up to five temperature dependent stress-strain curves.

• You may use only five points for each stress-strain curve.
• Each stress-strain curve must have the same set of strain values.

This option is used as follows:

Initialize the stress-strain table with TB,MKIN, followed by a special form of the TBTEMP command
(TBTEMP,,STRAIN) to indicate that strains are defined next. The constants (C1-C5), entered on the next
TBDATA command, are the five corresponding strain values (the origin strain is not input). The temper-
ature of the first curve is then input with TBTEMP, followed by the TBDATA command with the constants
C1-C5 representing the five stresses corresponding to the strains at that temperature. You can define
up to five temperature-dependent stress-strain curves (NTEMP = 5 max on the TB command) with the
TBTEMP command.

MKIN can also be used in conjunction with the TBOPT option (TB,MKIN,,,,TBOPT). TBOPT has the fol-
lowing three valid arguments:

0 - No stress relaxation with temperature increase (this is not recommended for nonisothermal
problems); also produces thermal ratcheting.
1 - Recalculate total plastic strain using new weight factors of the subvolume.
2 - Scale layer plastic strains to keep total plastic strain constant; agrees with Rice's model (TB, BKIN
with TBOPT = 1). Produces stable stress-strain cycles.

Note

The mechanical behavior of the TB,KINH option is the same as TB,MKIN with TBOPT =
2.

See Plastic Material Options in the Structural Analysis Guide for more information on this material option.

You can combine this option with other material options to simulate more complex material behaviors.
See Material Model Combinations (p. 151) for further information.

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 23
Chapter 3: Material Models

3.4.3. Nonlinear Kinematic Hardening

This option (TB,CHABOCHE) uses the Chaboche model for simulating the cyclic behavior of materials.
(See the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more information.) Like the BKIN and MKIN options, you
can use this model to simulate monotonic hardening and the Bauschinger effect. You can also superpose
up to five kinematic hardening models and an isotropic hardening model to simulate the complicated
cyclic plastic behavior of materials, such as cyclic hardening or softening, and ratcheting or shakedown.

The Chaboche model implementation takes the form of:

n n pl pl
αɺ = ∑ αɺ i = ∑ iεɺ − γiαiεɺ + i θα
ɺ
i
i i i θ

where:

α = back stress tensor

εpl = plastic strain tensor
εɺ
= accumulated equivalent plastic strain
θ = temperature
(A dot located above any of these quantities indicates the first derivative of the quantity with
respect to time.)
Ci and γi = material constants that you enter as inputs
n = number of nonlinear kinematic models that you specify as NPTS in the TB command

The yield function is:

σ ε  = σ − =

where:

σ = effectve equvaet stress

k = yield stress of materials that you enter as an input. You can also define k using BISO, MISO,
or NLISO, via the TB command.

Initialize the data table with TB,CHABOCHE. For each set of data, define the temperature (TBTEMP),
then define C1 through Cm (TBDATA), where m = 1 + 2NPTS. The maximum number of constants, m is
11, which corresponds to 5 kinematic models (NPTS = 5 on the TB command). The default value for m
is 3, which corresponds to one kinematic model (NPTS = 1). You can define up to 1000 temperature-
dependent constants ([NTEMP x m ≤ 1000] maximum on the TB command) in this manner. The constants
C1 through C(1 + 2NPTS) are:

Constant Meaning
C1 k = Yield stress
C2 C1 = Material constant for first kinematic model
C3 γ1 = Material constant for first kinematic model
C4 C2 = Material constant for second kinematic
model

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
24 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Plasticity Models

Constant Meaning
C5 γ2 = Material constant for second kinematic
model
... ...
C(2NPTS) CNPTS = Material constant for last kinematic
model
C(1 + γNPTS = Material constant for last kinematic
2NPTS) model

k, and all C and γ values in the right column are material constants in the Chaboche model (see the
Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for details).

See Plastic Material Options in the Structural Analysis Guide for more information on this material option.

You can combine this option with other material options to simulate more complex material behaviors.
See Material Model Combinations (p. 151) for further information.

3.4.4. Bilinear Isotropic Hardening

This option (TB,BISO) uses the von Mises yield criteria coupled with an isotropic work hardening assump-
tion. The material behavior is described by a bilinear stress-strain curve starting at the origin with pos-
itive stress and strain values. The initial slope of the curve is taken as the elastic modulus of the mater-
ial. At the specified yield stress (C1), the curve continues along the second slope defined by the tangent
modulus C2 (having the same units as the elastic modulus). The tangent modulus cannot be less than
zero nor greater than the elastic modulus.

Initialize the stress-strain table with TB,BISO. For each stress-strain curve, define the temperature (TB-
TEMP), then define C1 and C2 (TBDATA). Define up to six temperature-dependent stress-strain curves
(NTEMP = 6 max on the TB command) in this manner. The constants C1 and C2 are:

Constant Meaning Property

C1 Force/Area Yield stress
C2 Force/Area Tangent modu-
lus

See Plastic Material Options in the Structural Analysis Guide for more information on this material option.

You can combine this option with other material options to simulate more complex material behaviors.
See Material Model Combinations (p. 151) for further information.

3.4.5. Multilinear Isotropic Hardening

This option (TB,MISO) is similar to BISO except that a multilinear curve is used instead of a bilinear
curve. It can be used for non-cyclic load histories or for those elements that do not support the multi-
linear kinematic hardening option (MKIN). This option may be preferred for large strain cycling where
kinematic hardening could exaggerate the Bauchinger effect. The uniaxial behavior is described by a
piece-wise linear total stress-total strain curve, starting at the origin, with positive stress and strain values.
The curve is continuous from the origin through 100 (max) stress-strain points. The slope of the first
segment of the curve must correspond to the elastic modulus of the material and no segment slope
should be larger. No segment can have a slope less than zero. The slope of the stress-strain curve is
assumed to be zero beyond the last user-defined stress-strain data point.

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 25
Chapter 3: Material Models

You can specify up to 20 temperature-dependent stress-strain curves. For stress vs. total strain input,
initialize the curves with TB,MISO. For stress vs. plastic strain input, initialize the curves with
TB,PLASTIC,,,,MISO. Input the temperature for the first curve (TBTEMP), followed by up to 100 stress-
strain points (the origin stress-strain point is not input) (TBPT). Define up to 20 temperature-dependent
stress-strain curves (NTEMP = 20, maximum on the TB command) in this manner. The constants (X, Y)
entered on the TBPT command (two per command) are:

Constant Meaning Property

X Dimensionless Strain value
Y Force/Area Corresponding stress value

See Plastic Material Options in the Structural Analysis Guide for more information on this material option.

You can combine this option with other material options to simulate more complex material behaviors.
See Material Model Combinations (p. 151) for further information.

3.4.6. Nonlinear Isotropic Hardening

This option (TB,NLISO) uses either the Voce hardening law or the power law to describe the isotropic
hardening behavior of materials. You select either method by specifying the appropriate TBOPT value
on the TB,NLISO command. It is especially suitable for large-deformation analyses. When the power law
option is combined with GURSON plasticity, ductile plasticity and damage can be modeled. See Mater-
ial Model Combinations (p. 151) for further information. Also, combining the NLISO Voce hardening option
with the CHABOCHE nonlinear kinematic hardening option simulates cyclic hardening or softening be-
havior of materials (see the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for details).

Once you initialize the data table with TB,NLISO, you define the temperature via the TBTEMP command,
and then define either C1 through C4 (TBOPT = VOCE) or C1 and C2 (TBOPT = POWER) via the TBDATA
command. You can define up to twenty temperature-dependent stress-strain curves (NTEMP = 20
maximum on the TB command) in this manner.

Voce Con- Meaning

stants
C1 k = Yield stress
C2 Ro = Material constant in Voce hardening law
C3
∞ = Material constant in Voce hardening law
C4 b = Material constant in Voce hardening law
Power Con-
stants Meaning
C1 σ0 = Yield stress
C2 N = Power value in the power hardening law

See Plastic Material Options in the Structural Analysis Guide for more information on this material option.

3.4.7. Anisotropic
This option (TB,ANISO) allows for different stress-strain behavior in the material x, y, and z directions
as well as different behavior in tension and compression (see Anisotropic Elastic Material Model (p. 69)).

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
26 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Plasticity Models

A modified von Mises yield criterion is used to determine yielding. The theory is an extension of Hill's
formulation as noted in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference. This option is not recommended for
cyclic or highly nonproportional load histories since work hardening is assumed. The principal axes of
anisotropy coincide with the material (or element) coordinate system and are assumed not to change
over the load history.

The material behavior is described by the uniaxial tensile and compressive stress-strain curves in three
orthogonal directions and the shear stress-engineering shear strain curves in the corresponding directions.
A bilinear response in each direction is assumed. The initial slope of the curve is taken as the elastic
moduli of the material. At the specified yield stress, the curve continues along the second slope defined
by the tangent modulus (having the same units as the elastic modulus). The tangent modulus cannot
be less than zero or greater than the elastic modulus. Temperature dependent curves cannot be input.
All values must be input as no defaults are defined. Input the magnitude of the yield stresses (without
signs). No yield stress can have a zero value. The tensile x-direction is used as the reference curve for
output quantities SEPL and EPEQ.

Initialize the stress-strain table with TB,ANISO. You can define up to 18 constants with TBDATA com-
mands. The constants (C1-C18) entered on TBDATA commands (6 per command) are:

Constant Meaning (Units in Force/Area)

C1-C3 Tensile yield stresses in the material x, y, and z directions
C4-C6 Corresponding tangent moduli
C7-C9 Compressive yield stresses in the material x, y, and z directions
C10-C12 Corresponding tangent moduli
C13-C15 Shear yield stresses in the material xy, yz, and xz directions
C16-C18 Corresponding tangent moduli

See Plastic Material Options in the Structural Analysis Guide for more information on this material option.

3.4.8. Hill's Anisotropy

This option (TB,HILL) defines stress ratios for anisotropic yield and creep. Specifically, the following
simulations are available by combining the HILL option with other material options, as noted:

• Rate-independent anisotropic plasticity with isotropic hardening -- TB,HILL combined with TB,BISO
or TB,MISO or TB,NLISO.
• Rate-independent anisotropic plasticity with kinematic hardening -- TB,HILL combined with TB,BKIN
or TB,MKIN or TB,KINH or TB,CHAB.
• Rate-independent anisotropic plasticity with combined hardening -- TB,HILL combined with TB,CHAB
and TB,BISO or TB,MISO or TB,NLISO.
• Rate-dependent anisotropic plasticity (anisotropic viscoplasticity) with isotropic hardening -- TB,HILL
combined with TB,BISO or TB,MISO or TB,NLISO and TB,RATE.
• Anisotropic creep -- TB,HILL combined with TB,CREEP (implicit).
• Anisotropic creep and anisotropic plasticity with isotropic hardening -- TB,HILL combined with
TB,CREEP and TB,BISO or TB,MISO or TB,NLISO (implicit).
• Anisotropic creep and anisotropic plasticity with kinematic hardening -- TB,HILL combined with
TB,CREEP and TB,BKIN (implicit)

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 27
Chapter 3: Material Models

See Material Model Combinations (p. 151) for more information on combining the HILL option with the
plasticity and creep options.

The HILL option's material behavior is described by six constants that define the stress ratios in different
directions (see the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for details).

Initialize the data table with TB,HILL. For each set of data, you then define the temperatures using the
TBTEMP command, then define C1 through C6 using the TBDATA command. The input must then be
followed by the TB command again, but with one of the plasticity and / or creep options.

For each set of data, you then define the temperature using the TBTEMP command, and then define
the constants using the TBDATA command.

The constants C1 through C6 for the HILL option are:

Constant Meaning Property

C1 rxx
C2 ryy Tension / Compression ii
C3 rzz
C4 rxy
C5 ryz Shear ij
C6 rxz

For plasticity, rij is the ratio of the yield stress in the ij direction, to the yield stress specified for the
plasticity input as part of the TB command.

For creep, rij is the ratio of the creep strain in the ij direction to the reference value calculated by the
implicit creep equation.

3.4.9. Drucker-Prager
This option (TB,DP) is applicable to granular (frictional) material such as soils, rock, and concrete and
uses the outer cone approximation to the Mohr-Coulomb law (see the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference).
The input consists of only three constants:

• the cohesion value (must be > 0)

• the angle of internal friction
• the dilatancy angle.

The amount of dilatancy (the increase in material volume due to yielding) can be controlled with the
dilatancy angle. If the dilatancy angle is equal to the friction angle, the flow rule is associative. If the
dilatancy angle is zero (or less than the friction angle), there is no (or less of an) increase in material
volume when yielding and the flow rule is nonassociated. Temperature-dependent curves are not allowed.

Initialize the constant table with TB,DP. You can define up to three constants with TBDATA commands.
The constants (C1-C3) entered on TBDATA are:

Constant Meaning Property

C1 Force/Area Cohesion value

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
28 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Plasticity Models

Constant Meaning Property

C2 Angle (in de- Internal friction
grees)
C3 Angle (in de- Dilatancy
grees)

See Plastic Material Options in the Structural Analysis Guide for more information on this material option.

3.4.10. Extended Drucker-Prager

The Extended Drucker-Prager (TB,EDP) model is also used for granular material. (Also see EDP Cap Ma-
terial (p. 30).) This model supports various combinations of yield and potential functions as indicated
below:

Linear Yield Function

= + ασm − σ Y ε^pl =

where:

α = material parameter referred to pres-

sure sensitive parameter (input as C1 on
TBDATA command using TB,EDP)

σ ε
 = yied stress of ateria (in
ut as C2 on

TBDATA coand or in
ut using TB,MISO;
TB,ISO; TB,NLISO; or TB
B,PLS)

Power Law Yield Function

b + ασ − σ ε =



where:

α = material parameter referred to pres-

sure sensitive parameter (input as C1 on
TBDATA command using TB,EDP)
b = material parameter characterizing the
shape of yield surface (input as C2 on TB-
DATA command using TB,EDP):

σ ε =       3 

!"# # $   % !&'*+-.
!&/*+-. !&01*+-.  !&415+67

Hyperbolic Yield Function

= + = + ασ − σ ε> =
8 9 :< :

where:

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 29
Chapter 3: Material Models

α = material parameter referred to pres-

sure sensitive parameter (input as C1 on
TBDATA command using TB,EDP)
a = the parameter input as C2 on the TB-
DATA command.

σ Y ε^pl = yield stress of material (input as C3 on

TBDATA command or input using TB,MISO;
TB, ISO; TB,NLISO; or TB
B,PL
S)

Linear Plastic Flow Potential Function

= + ασ − σ  ε

Refer to the Linear Yield Function for parameter

definitions.
Power Law Plastic Flow Potential Function
= b + ασ − σ b ε



Refer to the Power Law Yield Function for paramet-

er definitions.
Hyperbolic Plastic Flow Potential Function
= 2 + 2 + ασ − σ ε


Refer to the Hyperbolic Yield Function for paramet-

er definitions.

You can use any combination of the yield and potential functions listed (above), but one of each must
be specified. The cap model, however, is a special EDP case that requires exclusive use of combined
cap potential and yield functions. More information on the EDP cap model is provided in the following
section.

When plasticity is defined by TB,MISO, TB,BISO, TB,NLISO, or TB,PLAS, that definition overrides the yield
stress definition you define using TB,EDP and TBDATA.

See the EDP argument and associated specifications in the TB command, and also The Extended
Drucker-Prager Model in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more information.

3.4.11. EDP Cap Material

The cap model is a subset of the TB,EDP data table operations. It is used for modeling the geomaterial
plasticity that results from compaction at low mean stresses, followed by significant pre-failure dilation,
but before shear failure occurs. The following table lists the coefficients that are addressed for the cap
model. If cap flow potential is not defined, associative cap model is assumed.

Cap Model TBOPT = CYFU TBOPT = CFPOT

Constants* Yielding Function (NPTS = 11) Flow Potential (NPTS = 4)
C1
  RF
C2
  

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
30 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Plasticity Models

Cap Model TBOPT = CYFU TBOPT = CFPOT

Constants* Yielding Function (NPTS = 11) Flow Potential (NPTS = 4)
C3 Xi βF
C4 σi αF
C5 βY
C6 A
C7 αY
C8 ψ
C9 c
W1

C10
D

C11 
2

See Cap Model in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more information on the constant conven-
tions.

You can input the cohesion-related shear hardening constant σi by using TB,MISO, TB,BISO, TB,NLISO,
or TB,PLAS. This input regulates the relationship between the cohesion and the effective deviatoric
plastic strain.

Note

Calibrating the cap constants σi, βY, A, αY, βF, αF and the hardening input for σi differs signi-
ficantly from the other EDP options. The cap parameters are all defined in relation to I1 and
J2, while the other EDP coefficients are defined according to p and q.

3.4.12. Gurson's Model

Gurson's model represents plasticity and damage in ductile and porous metals. A TB data table is used
to handle the data for both stress and strain controlled nucleation, both with and without coalescence.
Specify a TBOPT value on the TB,GURSON command to correspond to the Gurson basic model (TBOPT
= BASE), strain controlled nucleation (TBOPT = SNNU), stress controlled nucleation (TBOPT = SSNU),
or coalescence (TBOPT = COAL). The following table lists the coefficient values that are addressed for
the available TBOPT values.

Gurson TBOPT = BASE TBOPT = SNNU TBOPT = SSNU TBOPT = COAL

Model Con- Basic Model Strain-Controlled Stress-Controlled Coalescence
stants (NPTS = 5) Nucleation (NPTS Nucleation (NPTS (NPTS = 2)
= 3) = 3)
C1 σY - initial yielding fN - nucleation fN - nucleation fc - critical porosity
strength porosity porosity
C2 fo - initial porosity εN - mean strain σN - mean stress fF - failure porosity
C3 q1 - first Tver- SN - standard σ
SN - mean stress deviation
gaard-Needleman strain deviation

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 31
Chapter 3: Material Models

Gurson TBOPT = BASE TBOPT = SNNU TBOPT = SSNU TBOPT = COAL

Model Con- Basic Model Strain-Controlled Stress-Controlled Coalescence
stants (NPTS = 5) Nucleation (NPTS Nucleation (NPTS (NPTS = 2)
= 3) = 3)
C4 q2 - second Tver-
gaard-Needleman
constant
C5 q3 - third Tver-
gaard-Needleman
constant

You can combine certain TBOPT values to address specific model behaviors. The following combinations
are valid:

BASE and SNNU

BASE and SSNU
BASE and SNNU and COAL
BASE and SSNU and COAL
BASE and COAL

2
Although all three constants (q1, q2, q3) are independent input parameters, setting q3 = q1 is recom-
mended, unless specific data is available.

Isotropic hardening can be modeled using TB, BISO, TB, MISO, TB, NLISO or TB, PLASTIC.

3.4.13. Multilinear Elastic

This option (TB,MELAS) causes unloading to occur along the same path as loading. This behavior, unlike
the other options, is conservative (path-independent). The plastic strain (εpl) for this option should be
interpreted as a "pseudo plastic strain" since it returns to zero when the material is unloaded (no hys-
teresis). See the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for details.

The material behavior is described by a piece-wise linear stress-strain curve, starting at the origin, with
positive stress and strain values. The curve is continuous from the origin through 100 (max) stress-strain
points. Successive slopes can be greater than the preceding slope; however, no slope can be greater
than the elastic modulus of the material. The slope of the first curve segment usually corresponds to
the elastic modulus of the material, although the elastic modulus can be input as greater than the first
slope to ensure that all slopes are less than or equal to the elastic modulus.

Specify up to 20 temperature-dependent stress-strain curves. Initialize the curves with TB,MELAS. The
temperature for the first curve is input with TBTEMP, followed by TBPT commands for up to 100 stress-
strain points (the origin stress-strain point is not input). You can define up to 20 temperature- dependent
stress-strain curves (NTEMP = 20 max on the TB command) in this manner. The constants (X, Y) entered
on TBPT (two per command) are:

Constant Meaning Property

X Dimension- Strain value
less
Y Force/Area Corresponding
stress value

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
32 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Hyperelastic Material Models

See Multilinear Elasticity in the Structural Analysis Guide for more information on this material option.

3.4.14. Cast Iron Plasticity Material

The cast iron plasticity option (TB,CAST) uses a composite yield surface to describe the different beha-
vior in tension and compression. In tension the yielding is pressure-dependent and the Rankine maximum
stress criterion is used. In compression, the behavior is pressure independent and the Mises yield criterion
is used. A modified Mises potential is used as the flow potential. The elastic behavior is isotropic and
is the same in tension and compression. Cast Iron Plasticity with isotropic hardening is intended for
monotonic loading only and cannot be combined with any other material model.

Initiate the cast iron material model with TB,CAST. Activate the stress-strain table in tension using
TB,UNIAXIAL with the TENSION option, then enter the stress-strain relation using the TBPT command.
Activate the stress-strain table in compression using theTB, UNIAXIAL with the COMPRESSION option,
then enter the stress-strain relation using the TBPT command. The slope of the stress-strain curve is
assumed to be zero beyond the last user-defined stress-strain data point.

The NROPT,UNSYM command should be used at the solution level as the flow rule is not associated
and the material Jacobian matrix is unsymmetric.

Initialize the database with TB,CAST. For each set of data, define the temperature using TBTEMP, then
define the constant C1.

Constant Meaning Property

C1 Poisson's ra- Plastic tension
tio

See Plastic Material Options in the Structural Analysis Guide for more information on this material option.

3.5. Hyperelastic Material Models

Hyperelastic material behavior is supported by current-technology shell, plane, and solid elements. For
a list of elements that can be used with hyperelastic material models, see "Element Support for Material
Models". You can specify options to describe the hyperelastic material behavior for these elements.

Hyperelasticity options are available via the TBOPT argument on the TB,HYPER command.

Several forms of strain energy potentials describe the hyperelasticity of materials. These are based on
either strain invariants or principal stretches. The behavior of materials is assumed to be incompressible
or nearly incompressible.

The following hyperelastic material model topics are available:

3.5.1. Arruda-Boyce Hyperelastic Material
3.5.2. Blatz-Ko Foam Hyperelastic Material
3.5.3. Extended Tube Material
3.5.4. Gent Hyperelastic Material
3.5.5. Mooney-Rivlin Hyperelastic Material
3.5.6. Neo-Hookean Hyperelastic Material
3.5.7. Ogden Compressible Foam Hyperelastic Material
3.5.8. Ogden Hyperelastic Material
3.5.9. Polynomial Form Hyperelastic Material
3.5.10. Response Function Hyperelastic Material
3.5.11.Yeoh Hyperelastic Material

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 33
Chapter 3: Material Models

3.5.12. Special Hyperelastic Material Models

For information about other hyperelastic material models, see Special Hyperelastic Material Models (p. 43).

3.5.1. Arruda-Boyce Hyperelastic Material

The TB,HYPER,,,,BOYCE option uses the Arruda-Boyce form of strain energy potential given by:

 2 3
= µ 1− + 1 − + 1 −
 λL2 λL4
  2− 
+ 4 5 +
1 − + 1 −  − 
λL6 λL8 






where:

W = strain energy per unit reference volume

= first deviatoric strain invariant
J = determinant of the elastic deformation gradient F
µ = initial shear modulus of materials
λL = limiting network stretch
d = material incompressibility parameter

The initial bulk modulus is defined as:

As λL approaches infinity, the option becomes equivalent to the Neo-Hookean option.

The constants µ, λL and d are defined by C1, C2, and C3 using the TBDATA command.

For a list of elements that can be used with this material option, see "Element Support for Material
Models".

See Arruda-Boyce Hyperelastic Option in the Structural Analysis Guide for more information on this ma-
terial option.

3.5.2. Blatz-Ko Foam Hyperelastic Material

The TB,HYPER,,,,BLATZ option uses the Blatz-Ko form of strain energy potential given by:

µ

=  +  − 
 

where:

W = strain energy per unit reference volume

µ = initial strain shear modulus
I2 and I3= second and third strain invariants

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
34 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Hyperelastic Material Models

The initial bulk modulus k is defined as:

= µ

The model has only one constant µ and is defined by C1 using the TBDATA command.

See Blatz-Ko Foam Hyperelastic Option in the Structural Analysis Guide for more information on this
material option.

3.5.3. Extended Tube Material

The extended tube model is available as a hyperelastic material option (TB,HYPER). The model simulates
filler-reinforced elastomers and other rubber-like materials, supports material curve-fitting, and is
available in all current-technology continuum, shell, and pipe elements.

Five material constants are needed for the extended-tube model:

TBOPT Con- Purpose

stants
C1 Gc Crosslinked network modu-
lus
C2 Ge Constraint network modulus
C3 β Empirical parameter (0 ≤ β
≤1)
C4 δ Extensibility parameter
C5 d Compressibility parameter

Following the material data table command (TB), specify the material constant values via the TBDATA
command , as shown in this example:
TB,HYPER,1,,5,ETUBE ! Hyperelastic material, 1 temperature,
! 5 material constants, and the extended tube option
TBDATA,1,0.25, 0.8,1.0,0.5,1.0e-5 ! Five material constant values (C1 through C5)

For more information, see the documentation for the TB,HYPER command, and Extended Tube Model
in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference.

3.5.4. Gent Hyperelastic Material

The TB,HYPER,,,,GENT option uses the Gent form of strain energy potential given by:

   2− 
=−
µ m  − 1−  +  − 
m  
   

where:

W = strain energy per unit reference volume

µ = initial shear modulus of material
= li
iting value of −

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 35
Chapter 3: Material Models

1 = first deviatoric strain invariant

J = determinant of the elastic deformation gradient F
d = material incompressibility parameter

The initial bulk modulus K is defined as:

As Jm approaches infinity, the option becomes equivalent to the Neo-Hookean option.

The constants µ, Jm, and d are defined by C1, C2, and C3 using the TBDATA command.

For a list of elements that can be used with this material option, see "Element Support for Material
Models".

See Gent Hyperelastic Option in the Structural Analysis Guide for more information on this material option.

3.5.5. Mooney-Rivlin Hyperelastic Material

The Mooney-Rivlin model applies to current-technology shell, beam, solid, and plane elements.

The TB,HYPER,,,,MOONEY option allows you to define 2, 3, 5, or 9 parameter Mooney-Rivlin models using
NPTS = 2, 3, 5, or 9, respectively.

For NPTS = 2 (2 parameter Mooney-Rivlin option, which is also the default), the form of the strain energy
potential is:

= 0 − + 0 2− + − 2

where:

W = strain energy potential

=   
 
 



 =    

c10, c01 = material constants characterizing the deviatoric deformation of the material
d = material incompressibility parameter

The initial shear modulus is defined as:

µ=  + 

and the initial bulk modulus is defined as:

where:

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
36 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Hyperelastic Material Models

d = (1 - 2*ν) / (C10 + C01)

The constants c10, c01, and d are defined by C1, C2, and C3 using the TBDATA command.

For NPTS = 3 (3 parameter Mooney-Rivlin option, which is also the default), the form of the strain energy
potential is:

= 10 1 − + 01 2 − + 11 1 − 2− + − 2

The constants c10, c01, c11; and d are defined by C1, C2, C3, and C4 using the TBDATA command.

For NPTS = 5 (5 parameter Mooney-Rivlin option), the form of the strain energy potential is:

= − +


− + 
−

+ − + − 
− +
  −

The constants c10, c01, c20, c11, c02, and d are material constants defined by C1, C2, C3, C4, C5, and C6
using the TBDATA command.

For NPTS = 9 (9 parameter Mooney-Rivlin option), the form of the strain energy potential is:

=   − +   − +   − 

+   − + 3
− +   − 3  −

+   −  + 3+ − 
− +   − − 3 −

The constants c10, c01, c20, c11, c02, c30, c21, c12, c03, and d are material constants defined by C1, C2, C3,
C4, C5, C6, C7, C8, C9, and C10 using the TBDATA command.

See Mooney-Rivlin Hyperelastic Option (TB,HYPER) in the Structural Analysis Guide for more information
on this material option.

3.5.6. Neo-Hookean Hyperelastic Material

The option TB,HYPER,,,,NEO uses the Neo-Hookean form of strain energy potential, which is given by:

µ
= − + − 

where:

W = strain energy per unit reference volume

 = first deviatoric strain invariant
µ = initial shear modulus of the material
d = material incompressibility parameter.
J = determinant of the elastic deformation gradient F

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 37
Chapter 3: Material Models

The initial bulk modulus is defined by:

The constants µ and d are defined via the TBDATA command.

See Neo-Hookean Hyperelastic Option in the Structural Analysis Guide for more information on this
material option.

3.5.7. Ogden Compressible Foam Hyperelastic Material

The TB,HYPER,,,,FOAM option uses the Ogden form of strain energy potential for highly compressible
elastomeric foam material. The strain energy potential is based on the principal stretches of the left
Cauchy-Green tensor and is given by:

N
µ α α α α
N
µ −α β
=∑ i / 3
λ +λ +λ − +∑ i
−
i =
1
α i
1 2 3
i =
1
α β
i i

where:

W = strain energy potential

α
λ p


(=,,) = devatorc rncal stretch

J = determinant of the elastic deformation gradient

N, µi, αi and βk = material constants

For this material option, the volumetric and deviatoric terms are tightly coupled. Hence, this model is
meant to simulate highly compressible elastomers.

In general there is no limitation on the value of N. (See the TB command.) A higher value of N can
provide a better fit to the exact solution. It may however cause numerical difficulties in fitting the ma-
terial constants. For this reason, very high values of N are not recommended.

The initial shear modulus µ is defined by:

∑µα  

µ= = 

and the initial bulk modulus K is defined by:

 

= ∑µα 

+β 

=
  

For N = 1, α1 = –2, µ1 = -µ, and β1 = 0.5, the Ogden foam option is equivalent to the Blatz-Ko option.

The constants µi, αi and βi are defined using the TBDATA command in the following order:

For N (NPTS) = 1:

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
38 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Hyperelastic Material Models

µ1, α1, β1

For N (NPTS) = 2:

µ1, α1, µ2, α2, β1, β2

For N (NPTS) = 3:

µ1, α1, µ2, α2, µ3, α3, β1, β2, β3

For N (NPTS) = k:

µ1, α1, µ2, α2, ..., µk, αk, β1, β2, ..., βk

See Ogden Compressible Foam Hyperelastic Option in the Structural Analysis Guide for more information
on this material option.

3.5.8. Ogden Hyperelastic Material

The TB,HYPER,,,,OGDEN option uses the Ogden form of strain energy potential. The Ogden form is based
on the principal stretches of the left Cauchy-Green tensor. The strain energy potential is:

µ α
λ + λα + λα −
N N

=∑ i
+ ∑ − 2k

i = α 1 i
1 2 3
k =
1 k

where:

W = strain energy potential


-

λ p
(
= ,,) = devatorc
rnc
al stretches, defned as λ =
p

λ p

λp = principal stretches of the left Cauchy-Green tensor

J = determinant of the elastic deformation gradient
N, µp, αp and dp = material constants

In general there is no limitation on the value of N. (See the TB command.) A higher value of N can
provide a better fit to the exact solution. It may however cause numerical difficulties in fitting the ma-
terial constants. For this reason, very high values of N are not recommended.

The initial shear modulus µ is defined by:

µ= ∑α µ

=

The initial bulk modulus K is defined by:

For N = 1 and α1 = 2, the Ogden option is equivalent to the Neo-Hookean option. For N = 2, α1 = 2,
and α2 = -2, the Ogden option is equivalent to the 2 parameter Mooney-Rivlin option.

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 39
Chapter 3: Material Models

The constants µp, αp and dp are defined using the TBDATA command in the following order:

For N (NPTS) = 1:

µ1, α1, d1

For N (NPTS) = 2:

µ1, α1, µ2, α2, d1, d2

For N (NPTS) = 3:

µ1, α1, µ2, α2, µ3, α3, d1, d2, d3

For N (NPTS) = k:

µ1, α1, µ2, α2, ..., µk, αk, d1, d2, ..., dk

See Ogden Hyperelastic Option in the Structural Analysis Guide for more information on this material
option.

3.5.9. Polynomial Form Hyperelastic Material

The TB,HYPER,,,,POLY option allows you to define a polynomial form of strain energy potential. The
form of the strain energy potential for the Polynomial option is given by:

N N
= ∑ i j+ − 2k
ij 1 − 2− ∑
i + j =1 k =1 k

where:

W = strain energy potential

= f
rst dev
ator
c stra
n
nvar
ant

 =  

  

 

J = determinant of the elastic deformation gradient F
N, cij, and d = material constants

In general there is no limitation on the value of N. (See the TB command.) A higher value of N can
provide a better fit to the exact solution. It may however cause a numerical difficulty in fitting the ma-
terial constants, and it also requests enough data to cover the whole range of deformation for which
you may be interested. For these reasons, a very high value of N is not recommended.

The initial shear modulus µ is defined by:

µ= 0 + 0

and the initial bulk modulus is defined as:

=


Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
40 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Hyperelastic Material Models

For N = 1 and c01 = 0, the polynomial form option is equivalent to the Neo-Hookean option. For N =
1, it is equivalent to the 2 parameter Mooney-Rivlin option. For N = 2, it is equivalent to the 5 parameter
Mooney-Rivlin option, and for N = 3, it is equivalent to the 9 parameter Mooney-Rivlin option.

The constants cij and d are defined using the TBDATA command in the following order:

For N (NPTS) = 1:

c10, c01, d1

For N (NPTS) = 2:

c10, c01, c20, c11, c02, d1, d2

For N (NPTS) = 3:

c10, c01, c20, c11, c02, c30, c21, c12, c03, d1, d2, d3

For N (NPTS) = k:

c10, c01, c20, c11, c02, c30, c21, c12, c03, ..., ck0, c(k-1)1, ..., c0k, d1, d2, ..., dk

See Polynomial Form Hyperelastic Option in the Structural Analysis Guide for more information on this
material option.

3.5.10. Response Function Hyperelastic Material

The response function option for hyperelastic material constants (TB,HYPER,,,,RESPONSE) uses experi-
mental data (TB,EXPE) to determine the constitutive response functions.

The response functions (first derivatives of the hyperelastic potential) are used to determine hyperelastic
constitutive behavior of the material. In general, the stiffness matrix requires derivatives of the response
functions (second derivatives of the hyperelastic potential).

The method for determining the derivatives is ill-conditioned near the zero stress-strain point; therefore,
a deformation limit is used, below which the stiffness matrix is calculated with only the response func-
tions. The deformation measure is δ = I1 - 3, where I1 is the first invariant of the Cauchy-Green deform-
ation tensor.

The stiffness matrix is then calculated with only the response functions if δ < C1, where C1 is the mater-
ial constant deformation limit (default 1 x 10-5).

The remaining material parameters are for the volumetric strain energy potential, given by
N
= ∑ ( − )2k
k =1 k

where N is the NPTS value (TB,HYPER,,,,RESPONSE) and dk represents the material constants incompress-
ibility parameters (default 0.0) and J is the volume ratio. Use of experimental volumetric data requires
NPTS = 0. Incompressible behavior results if all dk = 0 or NPTS = 0 with no experimental volumetric
data.

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 41
Chapter 3: Material Models

3.5.11. Yeoh Hyperelastic Material

The TB,HYPER,,,,YEOH option follows a reduced polynomial form of strain energy potential by Yeoh.
The form of the strain energy potential for the Yeoh option is given by:

N N
= ∑ i0 i+ − 2k
1− ∑
i =1 k =1 k

where:

W = strain energy potential

= f
rst dev
ator
c stra
n
nvar
ant
J = determinant of the elastic deformation gradient F
N, ci0, and dk = material constants

In general there is no limitation on the value of N. (See the TB command.) A higher value of N can
provide a better fit to the exact solution. It may however cause a numerical difficulty in fitting the ma-
terial constants, and it also requests enough data to cover the whole range of deformation for which
you may be interested. For these reasons, a very high value of N is not recommended.

The initial shear modulus µ is defined by:

µ= 

and the initial bulk modulus K is defined as:

=


For N = 1 the Yeoh form option is equivalent to the Neo-Hookean option.

The constants ci0 and dk are defined using the TBDATA command in the following order:

For N (NPTS) = 1:

c10, d1

For N (NPTS) = 2:

c10, c20, d1, d2

For N (NPTS) = 3:

c10, c20, c30, d1, d2, d3

For N (NPTS) = k:

c10, c20, c30, ..., ck0, d1, d2, ..., dk

See Yeoh Hyperelastic Option in the Structural Analysis Guide for more information on this material option.

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
42 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Hyperelastic Material Models

3.5.12. Special Hyperelastic Material Models

The following hyperelastic material models have their own Lab value on the TB command (and are
not simply TBOPT hyperelasticity options on the TB,HYPER command):
3.5.12.1. Anisotropic Hyperelastic Material
3.5.12.2. Bergstrom-Boyce Material
3.5.12.3. Mullins Effect
3.5.12.4. User-Defined Hyperelastic Material

3.5.12.1. Anisotropic Hyperelastic Material

The anisotropic hyperelasticity material model (TB,AHYPER) is available with current-technology shell,
plane, and solid elements. Anisotropic hyperelasticity is a potential-based-function with parameters to
define the volumetric part, the isochoric part and the material directions.

Two strain energy potentials, as forms of polynomial or exponential function, are available for charac-
terizing the isochoric part of strain energy potential.

You can use anisotropic hyperelasticity to model elastomers with reinforcements, and for biomedical
materials such as muscles or arteries.

The strain energy potential for anisotropic hyperelasticity is given by:

= v + d ⊗ ⊗

The volumetric strain energy is given by:

= ⋅ − 2

The polynomial-function-based strain energy potential is given by:

3 3 6
i j

⊗ ⊗ = ∑ i 1− + ∑ j − + ∑ k 4− k
i =1 j =1 k =
6 6 6 6
+∑ l 5 − l+ ∑ m 6 − m+ ∑ n 7− n+ ∑ o 8 −ς o
l=  m= n= o =

The exponential-function-based strain energy potential is given by:

           
 ( ⊗ ⊗ ) = ∑=  (  − ) + ∑=  (  − ) + 


(
  − )
 −  +




(
 
− ) − 


Use TB,AHYPER,,TBOPT to define the isochoric part, material directions and the volumetric part. Only
one TB table can be defined for each option. You can either define polynomial or exponential strain
energy potential.

TBOPT Constants Purpose Input Format

POLY C1 to C31 Anisotropic strain en- TB,AHYPER,,,POLY
TBDATA,,A1,A2,A3,B1....
ergy potential

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 43
Chapter 3: Material Models

TBOPT Constants Purpose Input Format

EXP C1 to C12 Exponential anisotrop- TB,AHYPER,,,EXPO
TBDATA,,A1,A2,A3,B1,B2,B3,
ic strain energy poten- C1,C2,E1,E2
tial
AVEC C1 to C3 Material direction TB,AHYPER,,,AVEC
TBDATA,,A1,A2,A3
constants
BVEC C1 to C3 Material direction TB,AHYPER,,,BVEC
TBDATA,,B1,B2, B3
constants
PVOL C1 Volumetric potential TB,AHYPER,,,PVOL
TBDATA,,D

You can enter temperature-dependent data for anisotropic hyperelastic material via the TBTEMP com-
mand. For the first temperature curve, issue TB, AHYPER,,,TBOPT, then input the first temperature (TB-
TEMP). The subsequent TBDATA command inputs the data.

The program interpolates the temperature data to the material points automatically using linear inter-
polation. When the temperature is out of the specified range, the closest temperature point is used.

For more information, see the TB command, and Anisotropic Hyperelasticity in the Mechanical APDL
Theory Reference.

3.5.12.2. Bergstrom-Boyce Material

The Bergstrom Boyce option (TB,BB) is a phenomenological-based, highly nonlinear, rate-dependent
material model for simulation of elastomer materials. The model assumes inelastic response only for
shear distortional behavior defined by an isochoric strain energy potential, while the response to volu-
metric deformations is still purely elastic and characterized by a volumetric strain energy potential.

This model requires seven material constants input for the isochoric (TBOPT = ISO) option and one
material constant for the volumetric potential (TBOPT = PVOL) option. Issue the TBDATA data table
command to input the constant values in the order shown:

Isochoric

TB,BB,,,,ISO

Constant Meaning Property Units

C1 µ0 Initial shear modulus for Pa
Part A
C2 N0 ( λAlock )2, where λlock is the Dimension-
limiting chain stretch less
C3 µ1 Initial shear modulus for Pa
Part B
C4 N1 ( λBlock )2 Dimension-
less
C5 γɺ 0 Material constant s-1(Pa)-m
τm
base

C6 c Material constant Dimension-

less

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
44 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Hyperelastic Material Models

Constant Meaning Property Units

C7 m Material constant Dimension-
less
C8 ε Optional material constant Dimension-
less

The default optional material constant is ε = 1 x 10-5. However, if TBNPT > 7 or TBNPT is unspecified,
the table value is used instead. If the table value is zero or exceeds 1 x 10-3, the default constant value
is used.

Volumetric Potential

TB,BB,,,,PVOL

Constant Meaning Property Units

C1 d 1 / K, where K is the bulk 1 / Pa
modulus

For more information, see:

• The BB argument and associated specifications in the TB command documentation

• Bergstrom-Boyce Hyperviscoelastic Material Model in the Structural Analysis Guide
• Bergstrom-Boyce in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference

3.5.12.3. Mullins Effect

The Mullins effect is a modification to the nearly- and fully-incompressible isotropic hyperelastic con-
stitutive models (all TB,HYPER options with the exception of TBOPT = BLATZ or TBOPT = FOAM) and
is used with those models. The data table is initiated via the following command:

TB,CDM,MAT,NTEMPS,NPTS,TBOPT

The material constants for each valid TBOPT value follow:

Modified Ogden-Roxburgh Pseudo-Elastic

TBOPT = PSE2
Constant Meaning Property
C1 r Damage variable para-
meter
C2 m Damage variable para-
meter
C3 β Damage variable para-
meter

For more information, see:

• The CDM argument and associated specifications in the TB command documentation

• Mullins Effect Material Model in the Structural Analysis Guide

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 45
Chapter 3: Material Models

• Mullins Effect in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference.

3.5.12.4. User-Defined Hyperelastic Material

You can define a strain energy potential by using the option TB,HYPER,,,,USER. This allows you to provide
a subroutine USERHYPER to define the derivatives of the strain energy potential with respect to the
strain invariants. Refer to the Guide to ANSYS User Programmable Features for a detailed description on
writing a user hyperelasticity subroutine.

See User-Defined Hyperelastic Option (TB,HYPER,,,,USER) in the Structural Analysis Guide for more inform-
ation on this material option.

3.6. Viscoelastic Material Model

Viscoelastic materials are characterized by a combination of elastic behavior, which stores energy during
deformation, and viscous behavior, which dissipates energy during deformation.

The elastic behavior is rate-independent and represents the recoverable deformation due to mechanical
loading. The viscous behavior is rate-dependent and represents dissipative mechanisms within the
material.

A wide range of materials (such as polymers, glassy materials, soils, biologic tissue, and textiles) exhibit
viscoelastic behavior.

Following are descriptions of the viscoelastic constitutive models, which include both small- and large-
deformation formulations. Also presented is time-temperature superposition for thermorheologically
simple materials and a harmonic domain viscoelastic model.
3.6.1. Viscoelastic Formulation
3.6.2.Time-Temperature Superposition
3.6.3. Harmonic Viscoelasticity

For additional information, see Viscoelasticity in the Structural Analysis Guide.

3.6.1. Viscoelastic Formulation

The following formulation topics for viscoelasticity are available:
3.6.1.1. Small Deformation
3.6.1.2. Small Strain with Large Deformation
3.6.1.3. Large Deformation

3.6.1.1. Small Deformation

The following figure shows a one dimensional representation of a generalized Maxwell solid. It consists
of a spring element in parallel with a number of spring and dashpot Maxwell elements.

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
46 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Viscoelastic Material Model

Figure 3.1 Generalized Maxwell Solid in One Dimension

The spring stiffnesses are µi, the dashpot viscosities are ηi , and the relaxation time is defined as the
ratio of viscosity to stiffness, τi = ηi / µi.

In three dimensions, the constitutive model for a generalized Maxwell model is given by:

t t ∆
σ= ∫ −τ τ+ ∫ −τ τ (3–1)
0 τ 0 τ

where:

σ = Cauchy stress
e = deviatoric strain
∆ = volumetric strain
τ = past time
I = identity tensor
and G(t) and K(t) are the Prony series shear and bulk-relaxation moduli, respectively:

 n G  
=
αG∞ + ∑ αi − 
 i =1  τG   (3–2)
 i 

  K  
=  αK∞ + ∑ α − 
  =  τK  (3–3)
  

where:

G0, K0 = relaxation moduli at t = 0

nG, nK = number of Prony terms
αiG, αiK = relative moduli
τiG, τiK = relaxation time

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 47
Chapter 3: Material Models

For use in the incremental finite element procedure, the solution for Equation 3–1 (p. 47) at t1 = t0 +
∆t is:

 ∆  t
 −τ
i 1 = i( 0) − + αG − 1  τ
 τG  t∫ 0 i  τG  τ (3–4)
 i   i 

 ∆    −τ ∆
  = ( ) −  + ∫  αK
 −   τ (3–5)
 τK    τK  τ
      

where si and pi are the deviatoric and pressure components, respectively, of the Cauchy stress for each
Maxwell element.

The midpoint rule is used to approximate the integrals:

 ∆ 
 ∆ 

= ( ) − +
 τ   α − (
 τ 
−  ) (3–6)
     

 ∆   ∆ 
  = ( ) −  +  α
 −  (∆  − ∆  ) (3–7)
 τ   τ 
     

The model requires input of the parameters in Equation 3–2 (p. 47) and Equation 3–3 (p. 47). The relax-
ation moduli at t = 0 are obtained from the elasticity parameters input using the MP command or via
an elastic data table (TB,ELASTIC). The Prony series relative moduli and relaxation times are input via a
Prony data table (TB,PRONY), and separate data tables are necessary for specifying the bulk and shear
Prony parameters.

For the shear Prony data table, TBOPT = SHEAR, NPTS = nG, and the constants in the data table follow
this pattern:

Table Location Constant

1 α1G
2 τ1G
... ...
2(NPTS - 1) αnGG
2(NPTS) τnGG

For the bulk Prony data table, TBOPT = BULK, NPTS = nK, and the constants in the data table follow
this pattern:

Table Location Constant

1 α1K

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
48 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Viscoelastic Material Model

Table Location Constant

2 τ1K
... ...
2(NPTS - 1) αnKK
2(NPTS) τnKK

3.6.1.2. Small Strain with Large Deformation

This model is used when the large-deflection effects are active (NLGEOM,ON).

To account for large displacement, the model is formulated in the co-rotated configuration using the
co-rotated deviatoric stress Σ = RTsR, where R is the rotation obtained from the polar decomposition
of the deformation gradient. The pressure component of the Cauchy stress does not need to account
for the material rotation and uses the same formulation as the small-deformation model.

The deviatoric stress update is then expressed as:

 ∆   ∆ 
i = ∆ Σi ( 0 ) ∆
T − +
 τG 
G
0 αi − 
 τG  ( 1 −∆ 0 ∆
T
) (3–8)
 i   i 

where ∆R = R(t1)RT(t0) is the incremental rotation.

Parameter input for this model resembles the input requirements for the small-deformation viscoelastic
model.

3.6.1.3. Large Deformation

The large-strain viscoelastic constitutive model is a modification of the model proposed by Simo.
Modifications are included for viscoelastic volumetric response and the use of time-temperature super-
position.

The linear structure of the formulation is provided by the generalized Maxwell model. Extension to
large-deformation requires only a hyperelastic model for the springs in the Maxwell elements. Hypere-
lasticity is defined by a strain energy potential where, for isotropic materials:

= + (3–9)

where:

= right Cauchy-Green deformation tensor

= isochoric part of C
= determinant of the deformation gradient

The second Piola-Kirchhoff stress in the Maxwell element springs is then:

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 49
Chapter 3: Material Models

∂
= (3–10)
∂
i

and the large-deformation stress update for the Maxwell element stresses is given by:

′ ′
 ∆   ∆  
( )=1
( ) 0
−
 τ
+α

G
− 
 τ 
−  (3–11)

G

  
G
t


t



 ∆   ∆  

( )= ( )
  
−
 τ
+α

K


− 
 τ 
−  (3–12)

K
   
K
 





where:

′
=

deviatoric component of Si
=

pressure component of Si

An anisotropic hyperelastic model can also be used for Equation 3–9 (p. 49) , in which case the form of
the Maxwell element stress updates are unchanged.

This model requires the Prony series parameters to be input via the Prony data table (as described in
Small Deformation (p. 46)). The hyperelastic parameters for this model are input via a hyperelastic data
table (TB,HYPER). For more information, see Hyperelastic Material Models (p. 33).

3.6.2. Time-Temperature Superposition

For thermorheologically simple materials, the influence on the material behavior due to changing
temperature is the same as that due to changing time. For these materials, a rate-dependent material
response, P (a function of temperature and time), can be reduced to:

= r
ξ (3–13)

where:

T = current temperature
Tr = constant reference temperature
ξ = shifted time given by ξ = t / A(T), where A(T) = shift function.

The constitutive equations are solved in the shifted time scale. This method has the potential to reduce
the experimental effort required to determine the material parameters but requires the determination
of the shift function. The following forms of the shift function are available:
3.6.2.1. Williams-Landel-Ferry Shift Function
3.6.2.2.Tool-Narayanaswamy Shift Function
3.6.2.3. User-Defined Shift Function

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
50 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Viscoelastic Material Model

3.6.2.1. Williams-Landel-Ferry Shift Function

The Williams-Landel-Ferry shift function has the form:

( − )
( )= 1 r
(3–14)
+( − )
10
2 r

where C1 and C2 are material parameters. (The shift function is often given in the literature with the
opposite sign.)

The parameters are input via a shift function data table (TB,SHIFT).

For the Williams-Landel-Ferry shift function, TBOPT = WLF, and the required input constants are:

Table Location Constant

1 Tr
2 C1
3 C2

3.6.2.2. Tool-Narayanaswamy Shift Function

Two forms of the Tool-Narayanaswamy shift function are available, one of which includes a fictive
temperature.

The first form is given by:

 
( )=  −  (3–15)
 

where is the scaled activation energy.

The parameters are input in a shift function data table (TB,SHIFT).

For the Tool-Narayanaswamy shift function, TBOPT = TN, and the required input constants are:

Table Location Constant

1 Tr
2

The second form of the Tool-Narayanaswamy shift function includes an evolving fictive temperature.
The fictive temperature is used to model material processes that contain an intrinsic equilibrium tem-
perature that is different from the ambient temperature of the material. The shift function is given by:

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 51
Chapter 3: Material Models

 − 
( )=  − −  (3–16)
 r F 

where:

X = weight parameter
TF = fictive temperature.

The evolving fictive temperature is given by:

n

= ∑ fi fi (3–17)
i =1

where:

nf = number of partial fictive temperatures

Cfi = fictive temperature relaxation coefficient
Tfi = partial fictive temperature

The evolution of the partial fictive temperature is given by:

τ 0 + ∆ 0

 = 0 (3–18)
τ + ∆ 

where:

τ =
fictive temperature relaxation time
0 (superscript) = values from the previous time step

The fictive temperature model modifies the volumetric thermal strain model and gives an incremental
thermal strain as:

∆εT = α g ∆ +αl  − α g   ∆  (3–19)

where αg and αl are the glass and liquid coefficients, respectively, of thermal expansion given by:

α = α  + α 
+ α 2 2 + α 3 3 + α4 4 (3–20)

α = α + α + α  + α  + α  (3–21)

The parameters are input in a shift function data table (TB,SHIFT).

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
52 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Viscoelastic Material Model

For the Tool-Narayanaswamy with fictive temperature shift function, TBOPT = FICT, NPTS = nf, and the
required input constants are:

Table Location Constant

1 Tr
2 H/R
3 X
4 to 3(NPTS + 1) Tf1, Cf1, τf1, Tf2, Cf2, τf2, ..., Tfn, Cfn, τfn
3(NPTS + 1) + 1 to 3(NPTS + 1) + 5 αg0, αg1, αg2, αg3, αg4
3(NPTS + 1) + 6 to 3(NPTS + 1) + 10 αl0, αl1, αl2, αl3, αl4

3.6.2.3. User-Defined Shift Function

Other shift functions can be accommodated via the user-provided subroutine UsrShift, described in
the Programmer's Manual.

Given the input parameters, the routine must evolve the internal state variables, then return the current
and half-step shifted time.

3.6.3. Harmonic Viscoelasticity

For use in harmonic analyses, the generalized Maxwell model can be used to provide a constitutive
model in the harmonic domain.

Assuming that the strain varies harmonically and that all transient effects have subsided, Equa-
tion 3–1 (p. 47) has the form:

′ ′′ ′ ′′
σ= + Ω +δ + + ∆ Ω +δ (3–22)

where:

∆ = deviatoric and volumetric components of strain

′ ′′
= storage and loss shear moduli
′ ′′
= storage and loss bulk moduli
Ω δ = frequency and phase angle

Comparing Equation 3–22 (p. 53) to the harmonic equation of motion, the material stiffness is due to
the storage moduli and the material damping matrix is due to the loss moduli divided by the frequency.

The following additional topics for harmonic viscoelasticity are available:

3.6.3.1. Prony Series Complex Modulus
3.6.3.2. Experimental Data Complex Modulus
3.6.3.3. Frequency-Temperature Superposition
3.6.3.4. Stress

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 53
Chapter 3: Material Models

3.6.3.1. Prony Series Complex Modulus

The storage and loss modulus are related to the Prony parameters by:

 n  αG τGΩ 2   n  αG τGΩ 
′
= 0  − ∑  αiG + i i  ′′
= 0∑ i i 
+ τiGΩ 2   i =1  + τiGΩ 2 
(3–23)
 i =1 

   αK K  

τ
Ω  
  αK τK Ω 
′
=   − ∑  αK
+ ′′
= ∑


+ τK 
= + τK
Ω  
(3–24)

=
Ω  

Input of the Prony series parameters for a viscoelastic material in harmonic analyses follows the input
method for viscoelasticity in the time domain detailed above.

3.6.3.2. Experimental Data Complex Modulus

Storage and loss moduli can also be input as piecewise linear functions of frequency on a data table
for experimental data. Isotropic elastic moduli can be input for the complex shear, bulk and tensile
modulus as well as the complex Poisson's ratio.

The points for the experimental data table (input via the TBPT command) have frequency as the inde-
pendent variable, and the dependent variables are the real component, imaginary component, and
tan(δ). If the imaginary component is empty or zero for the data point, the tan(δ) value is used to de-
termine it; otherwise tan(δ) is not used.

Input complex shear modulus on an experimental data table (TB,EXPE) with TBOPT = GMODULUS. The
data points are defined by:

Position Value
1 Ω
2 ′

3 ′′

4 ′′
δ =
′

Input complex bulk modulus on an experimental data table (TB,EXPE) with TBOPT = KMODULUS. The
data points are defined by:

Position Value
1 Ω
2 ′

3 ′′

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
54 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Viscoelastic Material Model

Position Value
4 ′′
δ =
′

Input complex tensile modulus on an experimental data table (TB,EXPE) with TBOPT = EMODULUS.
The data points are defined by:

Position Value
1 Ω
2 ′

3 ′′

4 ′′
δ =
′

Input complex Poisson's ratio on an experimental data table (TB,EXPE) with TBOPT = NUXY. The data
points are defined by:

Position Value
1 Ω
2
ν′
3
ν′′
4
ν′′
δ =
ν′

Using experimental data to define the complex constitutive model requires elastic constants (defined
via MP or by an elastic data table [TB,ELASTIC]). The elastic constants are unused if two sets of complex
modulus experimental data are defined. This model also requires an empty Prony data table (TB,PRONY)
with TBOPT = EXPERIMENTAL.

Two elastic constants are required to define the complex constitutive model. If only one set of experi-
mental data for a complex modulus is defined, the Poisson's ratio (defined via MP or by elastic data
table) is used as the second elastic constant.

3.6.3.3. Frequency-Temperature Superposition

For thermorheologically simple materials in the frequency domain, frequency-temperature superposition
is analogous to using time-temperature superposition to shift inverse frequency. The Williams-Landel-
Ferry and Tool-Narayanaswamy (without fictive temperature) shift functions can be used in the frequency
domain, and the material parameter input follows the shift table input described in Time-Temperature
Superposition (p. 50).

Frequency-temperature superposition can be used with either the Prony series complex modulus or
any of the experimental data for complex moduli or Poisson's ratio.

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 55
Chapter 3: Material Models

3.6.3.4. Stress
The magnitude of the real and imaginary stress components are obtained from expanding Equa-
tion 3–22 (p. 53) and using the storage and loss moduli from either the Prony series parameters or the
experimental data:

σ = ( ′ ′
) (
− ′′ ′′ + ′ ′
∆ − ′′ ∆′′ ) (3–25)

σ = ( ′ ′′
) (
+ ′′ ′ + ′ ′′
∆ + ′′ ∆′ ) (3–26)

where:

Re(σ) = real stress magnitude

Im(σ) = imaginary stress magnitude

3.7. Microplane Material Model

The microplane model is based on research by Bazant and Gambarova [1 (p. 61)][2 (p. 62)] in which
the material behavior is modeled through uniaxial stress-strain laws on various planes.

Directional-dependent stiffness degradation is modeled through uniaxial damage laws on individual

potential failure planes, leading to a macroscopic anisotropic damage formulation.

The model is well suited for simulating engineering materials consisting of various aggregate composi-
tions with differing properties (for example, concrete modeling, in which rock and sand are embedded
in a weak matrix of cements).

The following topics concerning the microplane material model are available:
3.7.1. Microplane Modeling
3.7.2. Material Models with Degradation and Damage
3.7.3. Material Parameters Definition and Example Input
3.7.4. Element Support for the Microplane Material Model
3.7.5. Learning More About Microplane Material Modeling

3.7.1. Microplane Modeling

Microplane theory is summarized in three primary steps.

1. Apply a kinematic constraint to relate the macroscopic strain tensors to their microplane counterparts.
2. Define the constitutive laws on the microplane levels, where unidirectional constitutive equations
(such as stress and strain components) are applied on each microplane.
3. Relate the homogenization process on the material point level to derive the overall material response.
(Homogenization is based on the principle of energy equivalence.)

The microplane material model formulation is based on the assumption that microscopic free energy
Ψmic on the microplane level exists and that the integral of Ψmic over all microplanes is equivalent to a
macroscopic free Helmholtz energy Ψmac [3 (p. 62)], expressed as:

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
56 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Microplane Material Model

ψmac = ∫ψ
mic
Ω
πΩ

The factor π results from the integration of the sphere of unit radius with respect to the area Ω.

The strains and stresses at microplanes are additively decomposed into volumetric and deviatoric parts,
respectively, based on the volumetric-deviatoric (V-D) split.

The strain split is expressed as:

= D + εv

The scalar microplane volumetric strain εv results from:

ε = =

where V is the second-order volumetric projection tensor and 1 the second-order identity tensor.

The deviatoric microplane strain vector εD is calculated as:

ε
= = ⋅∏− ⋅ ⊗ = ⋅ ∏ de

where Π is the fourth-order identity tensor and the vector n describes the normal on the microsphere
(microplane).

The macroscopic strain ε is expressed as:

ε= ∫ ( ε + T ⋅ ε ) Ω
πΩ

The stresses can then be derived as

∂ψ
σ= ∫ Ω= ∫ ( σ + ⋅ σ
) Ω
π Ω ∂ε πΩ

where σv and σD are the scalar volumetric stress and the deviatoric stress tensor on the microsphere,
σ = σ σ = σ
and .

Assume isotropic elasticity:

∂ψ
= = 
∂ε

and

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 57
Chapter 3: Material Models

∂È mic mic
D =
∂εD
= D

where Kmic and Gmic are microplane elasticity parameters and can be interpreted as a sort of microplane
bulk and shear modulus.

The integrals of the macroscopic strain equation and the derived stresses equation are solved via nu-
merical integration:

 Np



= ∫ Ω= ∑( )⋅
πΩ π
=1

where wi is the weight factor.

3.7.1.1. Discretization
Discretization is the transfer from the microsphere to microplanes which describe the approximate form
of the sphere. Forty-two microplanes are used for the numerical integration. Due to the symmetry of
the microplanes (where every other plane has the same normal direction), 21 microplanes are considered
and summarized.[3 (p. 62)]

The following figure illustrates the discretization process:

Figure 3.2 Sphere Discretization by 42 Microplanes

3.7.2. Material Models with Degradation and Damage

To account for material degradation and damage, the microscopic free-energy function is modified to
include a damage parameter, yielding:

 (  ) = (  )  (

v  − v )

 ≤
The damage parameter d mic
is the normalized damage variable
{ ≤ }.
The stresses are derived by:

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
58 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Microplane Material Model

∂ mic
σ= ∫
πΩ ∂
Ω= ∫
πΩ
( v+
T⋅
D Ω)

where
( ) (

 = −

)

and
 ( ) (
 = − 
) 

.

The damage status of a material is described by the equivalent-strain-based damage function

Φ
= ϕ η
− 
≤ , where ηmic is the equivalent strain energy, which characterizes the damage
evolution law and is defined as:

ηa = 0 1 + 22
11 + 2 2

where I1 is the first invariant of the strain tensor ε, J2 is the second invariant of the deviatoric part of
the strain tensor ε, and k0, k1, and k2 are material parameters that characterize the form of damage
function. The equivalent strain function implies the Mises-Hencky-Huber criterion for k0 = k1 = 0, and
k2 = 1, and the Drucker-Prager-criterion for k0 > 0, k1 = 0, and k2 = 1.

The damage evolution is modeled by the following function:


 = − γ o  − α  + α  ⋅ (β  ( γ 
o − η  ) ) 
η  

where αmic defines the maximal degradation, βmic determines the rate of damage evolution, and
γ
 characterizes the equivalent strain energy on which the material damaging starts (damage starting
boundary).

The following figure shows the evolution of the damage variable d as a function of equivalent strain
energy ηmic for the implemented exponential damage model:

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 59
Chapter 3: Material Models

Figure 3.3 Damage Parameter d Depending on the Equivalent Strain Energy

This figure shows the stress-strain behavior for uniaxial tension:

Figure 3.4 Stress-strain Behavior at Uniaxial Tension

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
60 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Microplane Material Model

3.7.3. Material Parameters Definition and Example Input

γmic
The material parameters in the model are: E, ν, k0, k1, k2, 0 , and βmic.

E is Young’s modulus and ν is Poisson’s ratio. Both are microplane elastic properties and are defined
via the MP command.

γ

The parameters k0, k1, k2, , and βmic are defined via the TB command (TB,MPLANE).

The command syntax is:

TB,MPLAN,MAT,NTEMP,NPTS,TBOPT
TBDATA,1,C1,C2,C3,C4,C5,C6

The following table describes the material constants:

Constant Meaning Property

C1 k0 Damage function constant
C2 k1 Damage function constant
C3 k2 Damage function constant

γ
C4 Critical equivalent-strain-energy
 density
C5 αmic Maximum damage parameter
mic
C6 β Scale for rate of damage

Example 3.1 Microplane Material Constant Input

Define elastic properties of material
MP,EX,1,60000.0
MP,NUXY,1,0.36

Define microplane model properties

TB,MPLANE,1,,6
TBDATA,1,0,0,1,0.1,0.1,0.1

3.7.4. Element Support for the Microplane Material Model

The following current-technology elements support the microplane material model:

• PLANE182 and PLANE183 with plane strain and axisymmetric stress states
• SOLID185, SOLID186, and SOLID187

The model can be used with reinforcing elements REINF264 and REINF265 to model reinforced concrete.

3.7.5. Learning More About Microplane Material Modeling

The following list of resources offers more information about microplane material modeling:

1. Bazant, Z. P., P.G. Gambarova . “Crack Shear in Concrete: Crack Band Microplane Model.” Journal of
Structural Engineering . 110 (1984): 2015-2036.

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 61
Chapter 3: Material Models

2. Bazant, Z. P., B. H. Oh. “Microplane Model for Progressive Fracture of Concrete and Rock.” Journal for
Engineering Mechanics . 111 (1985): 559-582.
3. Leukart, M., E. Ramm. “A Comparison of Damage Models Formulated on Different Material Scales.”
Computational Materials Science. 28.3-4 (2003): 749-762.

3.8. Porous Media

Issue the TB,PM command to define material model constants for a porous medium. Fluid permeability
(PERM) and Biot coefficient (BIOT) options are available.

Material constants for TBOPT = PERM

Constant Meaning Property Units

C1 kx Permeability coeffi- -
cient
C2 ky Permeability coeffi- -
cient
C3 kz Permeability coeffi- -
cient

Material constants for TBOPT = BIOT

Constant Meaning Property Units

C1 α Biot coefficient Dimension-
less
C2 km Biot modulus Defaults to
zero.

For more information, see:

• The PM argument and associated specifications in the TB command documentation

• Pore-Fluid-Diffusion-Structural Analysis in the Coupled-Field Analysis Guide
• Porous Media Flow in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference

3.9. Magnetic Material Model

Elements with magnetic capability use the TB table to input points characterizing B-H curves. Temper-
ature-dependent curves cannot be input.

Initialize the curves with the TB,BH command. Use TBPT commands to define up to 500 points (H, B).
The constants (X, Y) entered on TBPT (two per command) are:

Constant Meaning Property

X Magnetomotive Magnetic field intensity (H)
force/length
Y Flux/Area Corresponding magnetic flux density
(B)

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
62 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 High-Frequency Electromagnetic Material Models

Specify the system of units (MKS or user defined) with EMUNIT, which also determines the value of the
permeability of free space. This value is used with the relative permeability property values (MP) to es-
tablish absolute permeability values. The defaults (also obtained for Lab = MKS) are MKS units and
free-space permeability of 4 πE-7 Henries/meter. You can specify Lab = MUZRO to define any system
of units, then input free-space permeability.

For more information about this material option, see Additional Guidelines for Defining Regional Mater-
ial Properties and Real Constants in the Low-Frequency Electromagnetic Analysis Guide

3.10. High-Frequency Electromagnetic Material Models

Specify high-frequency electromagnetic material properties using the TB command. The following
topics provide specific information about the various high-frequency material model (Lab) options
available:
3.10.1. 3-D High-Frequency Material Properties
3.10.2. 2-D High-Frequency Material Properties

3.10.1. 3-D High-Frequency Material Properties

High-frequency elements use the TB table to specify material properties such as anisotropic electric
current conductivity (mhos/m)(1/Ωm), anisotropic magnetic current conductivity (ohms/m), anisotropic
relative permittivity, anisotropic relative permeability, anisotropic electric and magnetic loss tangents,
and frequency-dependent lossy dielectric.

For a list of the elements that support 3-D high-frequency material properties, see "Element Support
for Material Models".

3.10.1.1. Conductivity, Permittivity, and Permeability Matrices

For electric current conductivity (TB,CNDE), magnetic current conductivity (CNDM), relative permittivity
(DPER), and relative permeability (TB,MUR,MAT,,,TBOPT with TBOPT = 0 – input a permeability matrix),
a 3 x 3 matrix relates terms ordered by x, y, and z.

 11 12 13 
=  21 
22 23 
 31 32 33 

The constants (C1-C9) entered on the TBDATA command are:

Constant Meaning
C1-C9 X11, X22, X33, X12, X23, X13, X21, X32, X31

If Xij is 0 where i and j are indexes, then Xji must also be zero.

For TB, DPER and TB,MUR the diagonal elements cannot be zero.

3.10.1.2. B-H Nonlinear Material Permeability Matrix

TB,MUR,MAT,,,TBOPT with TBOPT = 1 or 2 generates a B-H nonlinear material permeability matrix with
a uniform or nonuniform dc magnetic field, respectively. A nonuniform dc magnetic field can be the
solution of a magneto static analysis.

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 63
Chapter 3: Material Models

The matrix is give by the following equations for a static magnetic field (Ho) in the x, y, and z directions,
respectively.

 
µɺ r =  µr − κ  (Fo H
in x-di ection)

 κ µr 

 µ κ
 
µɺ  =      y
  

 − κ µ 

 µ −κ 
µɺ  =  κ 
µ     z

 

where:

ωm ω0 + ωα
µ = +
2
ω0 + ωα − ω2
ω!ω
κ=
#
ω" + ωα − ω#
ω$ = γµ$ %

ω& = γµ' s

α = γµ* ∆ ω
γ = γ+

and

• γ is the gyromagnetic ratio

• γ0 is the electron gyromagnetic ratio
• g is the Lande factor
• Ho is the static magnetic field in the z, y, or x direction
• Ms is the saturation magnetization introduced by Ho
• ∆H is the resonance line width
• ω is the working angular frequency

The constants (C1-C7) entered on TBDATA are:

Con- Meaning
stant
C1 Saturation magnetization 4πMs (Gauss) (no de-
fault).

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
64 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 High-Frequency Electromagnetic Material Models

Con- Meaning
stant
C2 Lande g-factor (1.8 to 2.5, defaults to 2.0).
C3 Resonance line width ∆H (Oe) (defaults to 0).
C4 Internal dc magnetic field Ho (Oe) (no default).
C5 Direction of Ho.

0 - z direction (default)
1 - y direction (default)
2 - x direction (default)
C6 Sign of off-diagonal element of permeab-
ility matrix.

C6 ≥ 0,
 µr −κ 
µɺ r =  κ 
µr  (default)
 

< 
 µ κ 
µɺ =  − κ 
µ  

 

C7 Symmetry key for permeability matrix.

0 – antisymmetric matrix (default)

1 – symmetric matrix

3.10.1.3. Anisotropic Electric and Magnetic Loss Tangents

You can specify anisotropic electric and magnetic loss tangent matrices using TB,LSEM. The anisotropic
electric loss tangent matrix is defined as:

ε′1 − δ1 
 
[ε ] = ε  ε′2 − δ2 
 ε′3 − δ3 


where:

ε′′ ε′′ ε′′

δ =  δ =  δ =
ε′ ε′ ε′

The anisotropic magnetic loss tangent matrix is defined as:

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 65
Chapter 3: Material Models

µr′,1 − δm1 
 
[µ ] = µ0  µr′,2 − δm2 
 µr′,3 − δm3 
 

where:

= µ
′   = µ′   = µ′

µ′′ µ′′ µ′′
δ δ δ

 
The constants (C1-C6) entered on TBDATA are:

Constant Meaning
C1 Electric loss tangent in the X direction, tanδ1
C2 Electric loss tangent in the Y direction, tanδ2
C3 Electric loss tangent in the Z direction, tanδ3
C4 Magnetic loss tangent in the X direction,
tanδm1
C5 Magnetic loss tangent in the Y direction,
tanδm2
C6 Magnetic loss tangent in the Z direction,
tanδm3

3.10.1.4. Frequency-Dependent Lossy Dielectric

You can specify a frequency-dependent lossy dielectric using TB,HFFDLD. In this Debye relaxation po-
larization model, the complex permittivity is given by:

εs − ε∞
εcoplex = ε∞ +
+ ωτ

where:

τ = relaxation time
ε∞ = optical permittivity
εrs = static permittivity
ω = working angular frequency

The frequency-dependent lossy dielectric is characterized by a dielectric constant (εr) and a loss tangent
(tanδ) at two frequencies. In terms of Maxwell's equations, the real parts of the dielectric constant and
the conductivity are given by:

ε
− ε ∞
ε = ε ∞ +
+ ωτ 

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
66 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 High-Frequency Electromagnetic Material Models

ω2ε0 τ εrs − εr∞

σ = σ0 +
+ ωτ 2

where:

σ0 = DC conductivity
ε0 = free space permittivity

εr and σ are determined by the four parameters: εrs, σ0, ε ∞ , and τ. Experimentally measured values of
the dielectric constant and loss tangent are usually available at two frequencies:

εr1 and tanδ1 at a lower frequency ω1 of approximately 1 MHz

εr2 and tanδ2 at a higher frequency ω2 between 1 and 2 GHz

The lower frequency data is considered static or DC values. Accordingly, the static permittivity and DC
conductivity are given by:

εrs = εr1

σ0 = ω1ε0εr1tanδ1

If ε
∞ is known from experimental measurements, the Debye's model can then be completely defined
by calculating the relaxation time τ by:

− −
τ=
ω

where:
= ωε ε − ε∞ σ and σ = ωε ε  δ  − σ

Knowing τ, the material characteristics can be determined over the entire frequency range.

If ε∞ is unknown, the following equations (based on the higher frequency data) can be solved simul-
taneously for ε∞ and τ.

ε ε − ε∞
τ=
σ
− σ

+ ω τ
ε ∞ = ε  − ε  − ε 
ω τ

where:

σ2 = ω2ε0εr2tanδ2

The constants (C1-C8) entered on TBDATA are:

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 67
Chapter 3: Material Models

Con- Meaning
stant
C1 Lower frequency (f1) at which measured data is con-
sidered static or DC values.
C2 Higher frequency (f2) at which measured data is avail-
able.
C3 Relative permittivity at lower frequency (εr1).
C4 Relative permittivity at lower frequency (εr2).
C5
Relative permittivity at optical frequency ( εr∞ ). Input
if known. Calculated if it is not known.
C6 DC conductivity (σ0). It does not have to be defined if
the loss tangent at lower frequency is defined.
C7 Loss tangent at lower frequency (tanδ1). It does not have
to be defined if the DC conductivity is defined.
C8 Loss tangent at higher frequency (tanδ2).

3.10.2. 2-D High-Frequency Material Properties

The high-frequency 2-D modal analysis element HF118 uses the TB table to specify the following ma-
terial properties:

• TB,DPER – anisotropic relative permittivity

• TB,MUR,MAT,,,TBOPT with TBOPT = 0 – anisotropic relative permeability

The element must lie in an X-Y plane and a 3 x 3 matrix relates terms ordered by x, y, and z.

 xx

 
= yy 
 
 zz 

The constants (C1-C9) entered on the TBDATA command are:

Constant Meaning
C1-C9 Xxx, Xyy, Xzz, Xxy, 0, 0, Xyx, 0, 0

Note

HF118 can not use the TB table to specify the following:

• Anisotropic electric current conductivity (TB,CNDE)

• Anisotropic magnetic current conductivity (TB,CNDM)
• B-H nonlinear material permeability matrix with a uniform or nonuniform dc magnetic field
(TB,MUR,MAT,,,TBOPT with TBOPT = 1 or 2).

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
68 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Piezoelectric Material Model

3.11. Anisotropic Elastic Material Model

Anisotropic elastic capability (TB,ANEL) is available with current-technology plane and solid elements.
Input the elastic coefficient matrix [D] either by specifying the stiffness constants (EX, EY, etc.) with MP
commands, or by specifying the terms of the matrix with data table commands as described below.
The matrix should be symmetric and positive definite (requiring all determinants to be positive).

The full 6 x 6 elastic coefficient matrix [D] relates terms ordered x, y, z, xy, yz, xz via 21 constants as
shown below.

 11 
 
 21 22 
 31 32 33 Symmetric 
 
 41 42 43 44 
 
 51 52 53 54 55 
 61 62 63 64 65 66 

For 2-D problems, a 4 x 4 matrix relates terms ordered x, y, z, xy via 10 constants (D11, D21, D22, D31,
D32, D33, D41, D42, D43, D44). Note, the order of the vector is expected as {x, y, z, xy, yz, xz}, whereas for
some published materials the order is given as {x, y, z, yz, xz, xy}. This difference requires the "D" matrix
terms to be converted to the expected format. The "D" matrix can be defined in either "stiffness" form
(with units of Force/Area operating on the strain vector) or in "compliance" form (with units of the inverse
of Force/Area operating on the stress vector), whichever is more convenient. Select a form using TBOPT
on the TB command. Both forms use the same data table input as described below.

Enter the constants of the elastic coefficient matrix in the data table via the TB family of commands.
Initialize the constant table with TB,ANEL. Define the temperature with TBTEMP, followed by up to 21
constants input with TBDATA commands. The matrix may be input in either stiffness or flexibility form,
based on the TBOPT value. For the coupled-field elements, temperature- dependent matrix terms are
not allowed. You can define up to six temperature-dependent sets of constants (NTEMP = 6 max on the
TB command) in this manner. Matrix terms are linearly interpolated between temperature points. The
constants (C1-C21) entered on TBDATA (6 per command) are:

Con- Meaning
stant
C1-C6 Terms D11, D21, D31, D41, D51, D61
C7-C12 Terms D22, D32, D42, D52, D62, D33
C13-C18 Terms D43, D53, D63, D44, D54, D64
C19-C21 Terms D55, D65, D66

For a list of the elements that support this material model, see "Element Support for Material Models".

3.12. Piezoelectric Material Model

Piezoelectric capability (TB,DPER or via the MP command)) is available with the coupled-field elements.
Material properties required for the piezoelectric effects include the dielectric (relative permittivity)
constants, the elastic coefficient matrix, and the piezoelectric matrix.

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 69
Chapter 3: Material Models

Input the dielectric constants either by specifying orthotropic dielectric permittivity (PERX, PERY, PERZ)
on the MP command or by specifying the terms of the anisotropic permittivity matrix [ε] on the TB,DPER
command. The values input on the MP command will be interpreted as permittivity at constant strain
[εS]. Using TB,DPER, you can specify either permittivity at constant strain [εS] (TBOPT = 0), or permittivity
at constant stress [εT] (TBOPT = 1).

Input the elastic coefficient matrix [c] either by specifying the stiffness constants (EX, EY, etc.) with MP
commands, or by specifying the terms of the anisotropic elasticity matrix with TB commands as described
in Anisotropic (p. 26).

You can define the piezoelectric matrix in [e] form (piezoelectric stress matrix) or in [d] form (piezoelectric
strain matrix). The [e] matrix is typically associated with the input of the anisotropic elasticity in the
form of the stiffness matrix [c], and the permittivity at constant strain [εS]. The [d] matrix is associated
with the input of compliance matrix [s] and permittivity at constant stress [εT]. Select the appropriate
matrix form for your analysis using the TB,PIEZ command.

The full 6 x 3 piezoelectric matrix relates terms x, y, z, xy, yz, xz to x, y, z via 18 constants as shown:

 11 12 13 
 
 21 22 23 
 31 32 33 
 
 41 42 43 
 
 51 52 53 
 61 62 63 

For 2-D problems, a 4 x 2 matrix relates terms ordered x, y, z, xy via 8 constants (e11, e12, e21, e22, e31,
e32, e41, e42). The order of the vector is expected as {x, y, z, xy, yz, xz}, whereas for some published ma-
terials the order is given as {x, y, z, yz, xz, xy}. This difference requires the piezoelectric matrix terms to
be converted to the expected format.

Use the TB commands to enter the constants of the piezoelectric matrix in the data table. Initialize the
constant table with TB,PIEZ. You can define up to 18 constants (C1-C18) with TBDATA commands (6
per command):

Con- Meaning
stant
C1-C6 Terms e11, e12, e13, e21, e22, e23
C7-C12 Terms e31, e32, e33, e41, e42, e43
C13-C18 Terms e51, e52, e53, e61, e62, e63

See Piezoelectric Analysis in the Coupled-Field Analysis Guide for more information on this material
model.

3.13. Piezoresistive Material Model

Elements with piezoresistive capabilities use the TB,PZRS command to calculate the change in electric
resistivity produced by elastic stress or strain. Material properties required to model piezoresistive ma-
terials are electrical resistivity, the elastic coefficient matrix, and the piezoresistive matrix.

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
70 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Piezoresistive Material Model

You can define the piezoresistive matrix either in the form of piezoresistive stress matrix [π] (TBOPT =
0) or piezoresistive strain matrix [m] (TBOPT = 1).

The piezoresistive stress matrix [π] uses stress to calculate the change in electric resistivity due to
piezoresistive effect, while the piezoresistive strain matrix [m] (TBOPT = 1) uses strain to calculate the
change in electric resistivity. See Piezoresistivity in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more in-
formation.

The full 6x6 piezoresistive matrix relates the x, y, z, xy, yz, xz terms of stress to the x, y, z, xy, yz, xz terms
of electric resistivity via 36 constants:

 π11 π12 π13 π14 π15 π16 

π π22 π23 π24 π25 π26 
 21
 π31 π32 π33 π34 π35 π36 
 
 π41 π 42 π43 π44 π45 π46 
 π51 π52 π53 π54 π55 π56 
 
 π61 π62 π63 π64 π65 π66 

Con- Meaning
stant
C1-C6 Terms π11, π12, π13, π14, π15, π16
C7-C12 Terms π21, π22, π23, π24, π25, π26
C13-C18 Terms π31, π32, π33, π34, π35, π36
C19-C24 Terms π41, π42, π43, π44, π45, π46
C25-C30 Terms π51, π52, π53, π54, π55, π56
C31-C36 Terms π61, π62, π63, π64, π65, π66

For 2-D problems, a 4x4 matrix relates terms ordered x, y, z, xy via 16 constants.

Con- Meaning
stant
C1-C4 Terms π11, π12, π13, π14
C7-C10 Terms π21, π22, π23, π24
C13-C16 Terms π31, π32, π33, π34
C19-C22 Terms π41, π42, π43, π44

The order of the vector is expected as {x, y, z, xy, yz, xz}, whereas for some published materials the order
is given as {x, y, z, yz, xz, xy}. This difference requires the piezoresistive matrix terms to be converted
to the expected format.

See Piezoresistive Analysis in the Coupled-Field Analysis Guide for more information on this material
model.

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 71
Chapter 3: Material Models

3.14. Anisotropic Electric Permittivity Material Model

Elements with piezoelectric capabilities use the TB,DPER command to specify anisotropic relative electric
permittivity. You can define electric permittivity at constant strain [εS] (TBOPT = 0) or constant stress
[εT] (TBOPT = 1)

The program converts matrix [εT] to [εS] using piezoelectric strain and stress matrices.

The full 3x3 electric permittivity matrix relates x, y, z components of electric field to the x, y, z components
of electric flux density via 6 constants:

ε

11 ε12 ε13 
 ε22 ε23 
sym
 ε33 

Constant Meaning
C1-C6 ε11, ε22, ε33, ε12, ε23, ε13

For 2-D problems, a 2x2 matrix relates terms ordered x, y via 3 constants (ε11 ε22 ε12):

Constant Meaning
C1, C2, C4 ε11, ε22, ε12

3.15. Rate-Dependent Plastic (Viscoplastic) Material Models

The following options are available for rate-dependent plasticity (viscoplasticity) via the TB,RATE,,,,TBOPT
command:
3.15.1. Perzyna and Peirce Options
3.15.2. Exponential Visco-Hardening (EVH) Option
3.15.3. Anand Option
3.15.4. Specifying Rate-Dependent Plasticity (Viscoplasticity)

For further information about rate-dependent plastic (viscoplastic) material options, see Rate-Dependent
Plasticity in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference and Viscoplasticity in the Structural Analysis Guide.

3.15.1. Perzyna and Peirce Options

To simulate viscoplasticity, combine the RATE option with the BISO, MISO, or NLISO options. To simulate
anisotropic viscoplasticity, combine the RATE and HILL options with the BISO, MISO, or NLISO options.

The Perzyna option has the following form:

 σ 

/
εɺ pl = γ  − 
 σo 

The Peirce option has the following form:

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
72 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rate-Dependent Plastic (Viscoplastic) Material Models

 1/ m 
ɺε = γ  σ  − 
pl
  σo  
 

In both cases, σ is the material yield stress, εɺ is the equivalent plastic strain rate, m is the strain rate
hardening parameter, γ is the material viscosity parameter, and σo is the static yield stress of material.
σo is a function of some hardening parameter and can be defined by isotropic plasticity (for example,

TB,BISO). As γ approaches ∞ , or m approaches zero, or εɺ approaches zero, the solution approaches
the static (rate-independent) solution.

When m is very small, the Peirce model has less difficulty converging as compared to the Perzyna
model.

For details, see Rate-Dependent Plasticity in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference.

The two material constants for the Perzyna and Peirce models (defined by the TBDATA) are:

Con- Meaning
stant
C1 m - Material strain rate hardening para-
meter
C2 γ - Material viscosity parameter

Specify the PERZYNA model (TBOPT = PERZYNA) as follows: TB,RATE,,,2,PERZYNA

Specify the PEIRCE model (TBOPT = PEIRCE) as follows: TB,RATE,,,2,PEIRCE

3.15.2. Exponential Visco-Hardening (EVH) Option

The exponential visco-hardening (EVH) option offers nonlinear kinematic hardening using von Mises or
Hill plasticity.

The option has the following form:

 
 σ − σ 
εɺ  =  
 

−b ε 
σ
= +
ε + ∞ −
where .

This six material constants in the EVH option are input via the data table command (TBDATA) in the
order shown:

Con- Meaning
stant
C1 Ko = Material strain hardening paramet-
er
C2 Ro = Material strain hardening parameter

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 73
Chapter 3: Material Models

Con- Meaning
stant
C3 R∞ = Material strain hardening paramet-
er
C4 b = Material strain hardening parameter
C5 m = Material strain rate hardening
parameter
C6 K = Material viscosity parameter

Specify this option (TBOPT = EVH) as follows: TB,RATE,,,6,EVH

3.15.3. Anand Option

The ANAND option offers a unified plasticity model requiring no combination with other material
models.

Details for the Anand option appear in Anand Viscoplasticity Option in the Mechanical APDL Theory
Reference.

This option requires nine material constants input via the data table command (TBDATA) in the order
shown:

Con- Mean- Property Units

stant ing
C1 s0 Initial value of deformation resist- Stress
ance
Q = Activation energy Energy / Volume
C2 Q/R R = Universal gas constant Energy / Volume
temperature
C3 A Pre-exponential factor 1 / Time
C4 xi Stress multiplier Dimensionless
C5 m Strain rate sensitivity of stress Dimensionless
C6 h0 Hardening / softening constant Stress
C7 ^
Coefficient for deformation resist- Stress
ance saturation value
C8 n Strain rate sensitivity of saturation Dimensionless
(deformation resistance) value
C9 a Strain rate sensitivity of hardening Dimensionless
or softening

Specify this option (TBOPT = ANAND) as follows: TB,RATE,,,9,ANAND

3.15.4. Specifying Rate-Dependent Plasticity (Viscoplasticity)

Following is the general process for specifying rate-dependent plasticity (viscoplasticity):

1. Initialize the data table via TB,RATE and specify the model option (TBOPT) as described above.
2. Define the temperature (TBTEMP) for each set of data.

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
74 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Gasket Material Model

3. Define material constants (TBDATA) for each set of data.

You can define up to nine material constants via TBDATA commands, but only six constants per
command. For the Anand model, therefore, you must issue the TBDATA command more than
once.

The data table command (TBDATA) must be defined for the same material number to specify the
static hardening behavior of the materials (rate-independent and isotropic).

3.16. Gasket Material Model

The gasket model (TB,GASKET) allows you to simulate gasket joints with the interface elements. The
gasket material is usually under compression and is highly nonlinear. The material also exhibits quite
complicated unloading behavior when compression is released.

You can define some general parameters including the initial gap, stable stiffness for numerical stabil-
ization, and stress cap for a gasket in tension. You can also directly input data for the experimentally
measured complex pressure closure curves for the gaskets.

Sub-options are also available to define gasket unloading behavior including linear and nonlinear un-
loading. Linear unloading simplifies the input by defining the starting closure at the compression curves
and the slope. Nonlinear unloading option allows you to directly input unloading curves to more accur-
ately model the gasket unloading behavior. When no unloading curves are defined, the material beha-
vior follows the compression curve while it is unloaded.

Enter the general parameters and the pressure closure behavior data via the TBOPT option on the
TB,GASKET command. Input the material data (TBDATA or TBPT) as shown in the following table:

Gasket Data TBOPT Con- Meaning Input Format

Type stants
Initial gap (default = 0,
C1 meaning there is no initial
gap).
Stable stiffness (default =
C2 0, meaning there is no
General stable stiffness. [1] TB,GASKET,,,,PARA
PARA TBDATA,1,C1,C2,C3
parameters Maximum tension stress
allowed when the gasket
material is in tension (de-
C3
fault = 0, meaning there is
no tension stress in the
gasket material).
Compression Xi Closure value. TB,GASKET,,,2,COMP
TBPT,,X1,Y1
load closure COMP Yi Pressure value. TBPT,,X2,Y2
curve
Xi Closure value on compres-
TB,GASKET,,,2,LUNL
Linear un- sion curve where unload- TBPT,,X1,Y1
LUNL ing started.
loading data TBPT,,X2,Y2

Yi Unloading slope value.

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 75
Chapter 3: Material Models

Gasket Data TBOPT Con- Meaning Input Format

Type stants
Nonlinear Xi Closure value. TB,GASKET,,,2,NUNL
TBPT,,X1,Y1
unloading NUNL Yi Pressure value. TBPT,,X2,Y2
data [2]
Transverse XY, XZ Transverse shear values TB,GASKET,,,2,TSS
TSS TBDATA,1,TSSXY,TSSXZ
shear

1. Stable stiffness is used for numerical stabilization such as the case when the gasket is opened up
and thus no stiffness is contributed to the element nodes, which in turn may cause numerical
difficulty.
2. Multiple curves may be required to define the complex nonlinear unloading behavior of a gasket
material.

When there are several nonlinear unloading curves defined, the program requires that the
starting point of each unloading curve be on the compression curve to ensure the gasket
unloading behavior is correctly simulated. Though it is not a requirement that the temperature
dependency of unloading data be the same as the compression data, when there is a missing
temperature, the program uses linear interpolation to obtain the material data of the missing
temperature. This may result in a mismatch between the compression data and the unloading
data. Therefore, it is generally recommended that the number of temperatures and temper-
ature points be the same for each unloading curve and compression curve.

When using the material GUI to enter data for the nonlinear unloading curves, an indicator
at the top of the dialog box states the number of the unloading curve whose data is currently
displayed along with the total number of unloading curves defined for the particular material
(example: Curve number 2/5). To enter data for the multiple unloading curves, type the data
for the first unloading curve, then click on the Add Curve button and type the data for the
second curve. Repeat this procedure for entering data for the remaining curves. Click the Del
Curve button if you want to remove the curve whose data is currently displayed. Click the
> button to view the data for the next curve in the sequence, or click the < button to view
the data for the previous curve in the sequence. To insert a curve at a particular location in
the sequence, click on the > or < buttons to move to the curve before the insertion location
point and click on the Add Curve button. For example, if the data for Curve number 2/5 is
currently displayed and you click on the Add Curve button, the dialog box changes to allow
you to enter data for Curve number 3/6. You can define a total of 100 nonlinear unloading
curves per material.

You can enter temperature-dependent data (TBTEMP) for any of the gasket data types. For the first
temperature curve, issue TB,GASKET,,,,TBOPT, then input the first temperature using TBTEMP, followed
by the data using either TBDATA or TBPT depending on the value of TBOPT as shown in the table.

The program automatically interpolates the temperature data to the material points using linear inter-
polation. When the temperature is out of the specified range, the closest temperature point is used.

For more information, see Gasket Material in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference.

For a detailed description of the gasket joint simulation capability, see "Gasket Joints Simulation" in the
Structural Analysis Guide.

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
76 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Creep Equations

3.17. Creep Equations

The creep strain rate, εcr , can be a function of stress, strain, temperature, and neutron flux level. Libraries
ɺ
of creep strain rate equations are included under the Implicit Creep Equations (p. 77) and Explicit Creep
Equations (p. 79) sections. Enter the constants shown in these equations using TB,CREEP and TBDATA
as described below. These equations (expressed in incremental form) are characteristic of materials
being used in creep design applications (see the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for details).

For a list of the elements that support creep behavior, see "Element Support for Material Models".

Three types of creep equations are available:

• Primary creep
• Secondary creep
• Irradiation induced creep

You can define the combined effects of more than one type of creep using the implicit equations specified
by TBOPT = 11 or 12, the explicit equations, or a user-defined creep equation.

The program analyzes creep using the implicit and the explicit time-integration method. The implicit
method is robust, fast, accurate, and recommended for general use, especially with problems involving
large creep strain and large deformation. It has provisions for including temperature-dependent constants.
The program can model pure creep, creep with isotropic hardening plasticity, and creep with kinematic
hardening plasticity, using both von Mises and Hill potentials. See Material Model Combinations (p. 151)
for further information. Since the creep and plasticity are modeled simultaneously (no superposition),
the implicit method is more accurate and efficient than the explicit method. Temperature dependency
can also be incorporated by the Arrhenius function (see the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for details).

The explicit method is useful for cases involving very small time steps, such as in transient analyses.
There are no provisions for temperature-dependent constants, nor simultaneous modeling of creep
with any other material models such as plasticity. However, there is temperature dependency using the
Arrhenius function, and you can combine explicit creep with other plasticity options using non-simul-
taneous modeling (superposition). In these cases, the program first performs the plastic analysis, then
the creep calculation.

The terms implicit and explicit, as applied to creep, have no relationship to “explicit dynamics,” or any
elements referred to as “explicit elements.”

3.17.1. Implicit Creep Equations

Enter an implicit creep equation using TBOPT within the TB command. Enter the value of TBOPT cor-
responding to the equation, as shown in Table 3.2: Implicit Creep Equations (p. 77).

Table 3.2 Implicit Creep Equations

Creep Mod-
el
Name Equation Type
(TB-
OPT)
Strain Harden-
1 εɺ
= 1σC2ε
C3 −C4/ T C1>0 Primary
ing

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 77
Chapter 3: Material Models

Creep Mod-
el
Name Equation Type
(TB-
OPT)
Time Harden-
2 εɺ cr = 1σC2 C3 −C4/ T C1>0 Primary
ing
Generalized Ex- C1>0,
3 εɺ
= σ −
t , = 5 σ −  Primary
ponential C5>0
Generalized
4 εɺ
 = σ  +   + 6 7 −8 
C1>0 Primary
Graham

Generalized εɺ  = − − + C1>0,

5 
C3>0, Primary
Blackburn =  σ =  σ  =  σ C6>0
Modified Time
6 ε = #σ!% !& +# −!' ( " $ + C1>0 Primary
Hardening
Modified Strain
7 εɺ )* = 9σ
+<
: + ε)* += 9-.+= +90 −+; - , C1>0 Primary
Hardening
Generalized @E −@F G A Second-
8 εɺ >? = B Dσ C1>0
Garofalo ary
Exponential Second-
9 εɺ HI = L σ O JM −JN O K C1>0
form ary
Second-
10 Norton εɺ PQ = UσRV −RW X S C1>0
ary
Combined εYZ = ]σ[` [a +] −[b f \ ^ + C1>0,
Primary
11 Time Harden- + Sec-
ing + _ σ[d −[e f \ C5>0
ondary

∂εg
εɺ gh = j εg = + εɺ m
∂ + Primary
Rational poly-
12 inσ io C2>0 + Sec-
nomial εɺ m = k σ
ondary
i i
= l εɺ mp σiq = js εɺ muuσiuv

x −y {  z
εwx =
Generalized
13 Time Harden- = |σ + } σ} + ~ σ~ Primary
ing
=  + €σ

100 --- User Creep --- ---

where:

εcr = equivalent creep strain

εɺ ‚ƒ = change in equivalent creep strain with respect to time
σ = equivalent stress

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
78 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Creep Equations

T = temperature (absolute). The offset temperature (from TOFFST), is internally added to all
temperatures for convenience.
C1 through C12 = constants defined by the TBDATA command
t = time at end of substep
e = natural logarithm base

You can define the user creep option by setting TBOPT = 100, and using TB,STATE to specify the
number of state variables for the user creep subroutine. See the Guide to ANSYS User Programmable
Features for more information. The RATE command is necessary to activate implicit creep for specific
elements (see the RATE command description for details). The RATE command has no effect for explicit
creep.

For temperature-dependent constants, define the temperature using TBTEMP for each set of data. Then,
define constants C1 through Cm using TBDATA (where m is the number of constants, and depends on
the creep model you choose).

The following example shows how you would define the implicit creep model represented by TBOPT
= 1 at two temperature points.
TB,CREEP,1,,,1 !Activate creep data table, specify creep model 1
TBTEMP,100 !Define first temperature
TBDATA,1,c11,c12,c13,c14 !Creep constants c11, c12, c13, c14 at first temp.
TBTEMP,200 !Define second temperature
TBDATA,1,c21,c22,c23,c24 !Creep constants c21, c22, c23, c24 at second temp.

Coefficients are linearly interpolated for temperatures that fall between user defined TBTEMP values.
For some creep models, where the change in coefficients spans several orders of magnitude, this linear
interpolation might introduce inaccuracies in solution results. Use enough curves to accurately capture
the temperature dependency. Also, consider using the curve fitting subroutine to calculate a temperature
dependent coefficient that includes the Arrhenius term.

When a temperature is outside the range of defined temperature values, the program uses the coefficients
defined for the constant temperature.

For a list of elements that can be used with this material option, see "Element Support for Material
Models".

See Creep in the Structural Analysis Guide for more information on this material option.

3.17.2. Explicit Creep Equations

Enter an explicit creep equation by setting TBOPT = 0 (or leaving it blank) within the TB command,
then specifying the constants associated with the creep equations using the TBDATA command.

Specify primary creep with constant C6. Primary Explicit Creep Equation for C6 = 0 (p. 80), through Primary
Explicit Creep Equation for C6 = 100 (p. 86), show the available equations. You select an equation with
the appropriate value of C6 (0 to 15). If C1 ≤ 0, or if T + Toffset ≤ 0, no primary creep is computed.

Specify secondary creep with constant C12. Secondary Explicit Creep Equation for C12 = 0 (p. 86) and
Secondary Explicit Creep Equation for C12 = 1 (p. 87) show the available equations. You select an equation
with the appropriate value of C12 (0 or 1). If C7 ≤ 0, or if T + Toffset ≤ 0, no secondary creep is computed.
Also, primary creep equations C6 = 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, and 15 bypass any secondary creep equations since
secondary effects are included in the primary part.

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 79
Chapter 3: Material Models

Specify irradiation induced creep with constant C66. Irradiation Induced Explicit Creep Equation for C66 =
5 (p. 87) shows the single equation currently available; select it with C66 = 5. This equation can be used
in conjunction with equations C6 = 0 to 11. The constants should be entered into the data table as in-
dicated by their subscripts. If C55 ≤ 0 and C61 ≤ 0, or if T + Toffset ≤ 0, no irradiation induced creep is
computed.

A linear stepping function is used to calculate the change in the creep strain within a time step (∆ εcr

= ( εcr )(∆t)). The creep strain rate is evaluated at the condition corresponding to the beginning of the
ɺ
time interval and is assumed to remain constant over the time interval. If the time step is less than 1.0e-
6, then no creep strain increment is computed. Primary equivalent stresses and strains are used to
evaluate the creep strain rate. For highly nonlinear creep strain vs. time curves, use a small time step
if you are using the explicit creep algorithm. A creep time step optimization procedure is available for
automatically increasing the time step whenever possible. A nonlinear stepping function (based on an
exponential decay) is also available (C11 = 1) but should be used with caution since it can underestimate
the total creep strain where primary stresses dominate. This function is available only for creep equations
C6 = 0, 1 and 2. Temperatures used in the creep equations should be based on an absolute scale
(TOFFST).

Use the BF or BFE commands to enter temperature and fluence values. The input fluence (Φt) includes
the integrated effect of time and time explicitly input is not used in the fluence calculation. Also, for
the usual case of a constant flux (Φ), the fluence should be linearly ramp changed.

Temperature dependent creep constants are not permitted for explicit creep. You can incorporate
other creep options by setting C6 = 100. See the Guide to ANSYS User Programmable Features for more
information.

The following example shows how you would use the explicit creep equation defined by C6 = 1.
TB,CREEP,1 !Activate creep data table
TBDATA,1,c1,c2,c3,c4,,1 !Creep constants c1, c2, c3, c4 for equation C6=1

The explicit creep constants that you enter with the TBDATA are:

Constant Meaning
C1-CN Constants C1, C2, C3, etc. (as defined in Primary Explicit Creep
Equation for C6 = 0 to Irradiation Induced Explicit Creep Equation
for C66 = 5) These are obtained by curve fitting test results for
your material to the equation you choose. Exceptions are
defined below.

3.17.2.1. Primary Explicit Creep Equation for C6 = 0

εɺ
= 1σC2ε
C3 −C4/ T

where:

εɺ = change in equivalent strain with respect to time

σ = equivalent stress
T = temperature (absolute). The offset temperature (from TOFFST) is internally added to all
temperatures for convenience.
t = time at end of substep

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
80 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Creep Equations

e = natural logarithm base

3.17.2.2. Primary Explicit Creep Equation for C6 = 1

εɺ cr = 1σC2 C3 −C4/ T

3.17.2.3. Primary Explicit Creep Equation for C6 = 2

εɺ
= σ −
t

where:

= 5 σ − 

3.17.2.4. Primary Explicit Creep Equation for C6 = 9

Annealed 304 Stainless Steel:

∂ε

εɺ
 = 
∂

3.17.2.4.1. Double Exponential Creep Equation (C4 = 0)

To use the following Double Exponential creep equation to calculate

ε = ε x − − s + ε  − − + εɺ m

where:

εx = 0 for σ ≤ C2
εx = G + H σ for C2 < σ ≤ C3
C2 = 6000 psi (default), C3 = 25000 psi (default)

s, r, ε , G, and H = functions of temperature and stress as described in the reference.

ɺ

This double exponential equation is valid for Annealed 304 Stainless Steel over a temperature range
from 800 to 1100°F. The equation, known as the Blackburn creep equation when C1 = 1, is described
completely in the High Alloy Steels. The first two terms describe the primary creep strain and the last
term describes the secondary creep strain.

To use this equation, input a nonzero value for C1, C6 = 9.0, and C7 = 0.0. Temperatures should be in
°R (or °F with Toffset = 460.0). Conversion to °K for the built-in property tables is done internally. If the
temperature is below the valid range, no creep is computed. Time should be in hours and stress in psi.
The valid stress range is 6,000 - 25,000 psi.

3.17.2.4.2. Rational Polynomial Creep Equation with Metric Units (C4 = 1)

To use the following standard Rational Polynomial creep equation (with metric units) to calculate εc,
enter C4 = 1.0:

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 81
Chapter 3: Material Models

εc + + εɺ m
+

where:

c = limiting value of primary creep strain

p = primary creep time factor
εɺ = secondary (minimum) creep strain rate

This standard rational polynomial creep equation is valid for Annealed 304 SS over a temperature range
from 427°C to 704°C. The equation is described completely in the High Alloy Steels. The first term de-
scribes the primary creep strain. The last term describes the secondary creep strain. The average "lot
constant" is used to calculate ε
.
ɺ

To use this equation, input C1 = 1.0, C4 = 1.0, C6 = 9.0, and C7 = 0.0. Temperature must be in °C and
Toffset must be 273 (because of the built-in property tables). If the temperature is below the valid range,
no creep is computed. Also, time must be in hours and stress in Megapascals (MPa).

Various hardening rules governing the rate of change of creep strain during load reversal may be selected
with the C5 value: 0.0 - time hardening, 1.0 - total creep strain hardening, 2.0 - primary creep strain
hardening. These options are available only with the standard rational polynomial creep equation.

3.17.2.4.3. Rational Polynomial Creep Equation with English Units (C4 = 2)

To use the above standard Rational Polynomial creep equation (with English units), enter C4 = 2.0.

This standard rational polynomial equation is the same as described above except that temperature
must be in °F, Toffset must be 460, and stress must be in psi. The equivalent valid temperature range is
800 - 1300°F.

3.17.2.5. Primary Explicit Creep Equation for C6 = 10

Annealed 316 Stainless Steel:

1 ∂
∂ε
εɺ r =

3.17.2.5.1. Double Exponential Creep Equation (C4 = 0)

To use the same form of the Double Exponential creep equation as described for Annealed 304 SS (C6
= 9.0, C4 = 0.0) in Primary Explicit Creep Equation for C6 = 9 (p. 81) to calculate εc, enter C4 = 0.0.

This equation, also described in High Alloy Steels, differs from the Annealed 304 SS equation in that
the built-in property tables are for Annealed 316 SS, the valid stress range is 4000 - 30,000 psi, C2 defaults
to 4000 psi, C3 defaults to 30,000 psi, and the equation is called with C6 = 10.0 instead of C6 = 9.0.

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
82 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Creep Equations

3.17.2.5.2. Rational Polynomial Creep Equation with Metric Units (C4 = 1)

To use the same form of the standard Rational Polynomial creep equation with metric units as described
for Annealed 304 SS (C6 = 9.0, C4 = 1.0) in Primary Explicit Creep Equation for C6 = 9 (p. 81), enter C4 =
1.0.

This standard rational polynomial equation, also described in High Alloy Steels, differs from the Annealed
304 SS equation in that the built-in property tables are for Annealed 316 SS, the valid temperature
range is 482 - 704°C, and the equation is called with C6 = 10.0 instead of C6 = 9.0. The hardening rules
for load reversal described for the C6 = 9.0 standard Rational Polynomial creep equation are also available.

The average "lot constant" from High Alloy Steels is used in the calculation of εm .
ɺ

3.17.2.5.3. Rational Polynomial Creep Equation with English Units (C4 = 2)

To use the previous standard Rational Polynomial creep equation with English units, enter C4 = 2.0.

This standard rational polynomial equation is the same as described above except that the temperatures
must be in °F, Toffset must be 460, and the stress must be in psi (with a valid range from 0.0 to 24220
psi). The equivalent valid temperature range is 900 - 1300°F.

3.17.2.6. Primary Explicit Creep Equation for C6 = 11

Annealed 2 1/4 Cr - 1 Mo Low Alloy Steel:

∂εc
εɺ cr = 1
∂

3.17.2.6.1. Modified Rational Polynomial Creep Equation (C4 = 0)

To use the following Modified Rational Polynomial creep equation to calculate εc, enter C4 = 0.0:

ε = + εɺ

+

A, B, and ε are functions of temperature and stress as described in the reference.

ɺ

This modified rational polynomial equation is valid for Annealed 2 1/4 Cr -1 Mo Low Alloy steel over a
temperature range of 700 - 1100°F. The equation is described completely in the Low Alloy Steels. The
first term describes the primary creep strain and the last term describes the secondary creep strain. No
modification is made for plastic strains.

To use this equation, input C1 = 1.0, C6 = 11.0, and C7 = 0.0. Temperatures must be in °R (or °F with
Toffset = 460.0). Conversion to °K for the built-in property tables is done internally. If the temperature is
below the valid range, no creep is computed. Time should be in hours and stress in psi. Valid stress
range is 1000 - 65,000 psi.

3.17.2.6.2. Rational Polynomial Creep Equation with Metric Units (C4 = 1)

To use the following standard Rational Polynomial creep equation (with metric units) to calculate εc,
enter C4 = 1.0:

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 83
Chapter 3: Material Models

εc + + εɺ m
+

where:

c = limiting value of primary creep strain

p = primary creep time factor
εɺ = secondary (minimum) creep strain rate

This standard rational polynomial creep equation is valid for Annealed 2 1/4 Cr - 1 Mo Low Alloy Steel
over a temperature range from 371°C to 593°C. The equation is described completely in the Low Alloy
Steels. The first term describes the primary creep strain and the last term describes the secondary creep
strain. No tertiary creep strain is calculated. Only Type I (and not Type II) creep is supported. No modi-
fication is made for plastic strains.

To use this equation, input C1 = 1.0, C4 = 1.0, C6 = 11.0, and C7 = 0.0. Temperatures must be in °C and
Toffset must be 273 (because of the built-in property tables). If the temperature is below the valid range,
no creep is computed. Also, time must be in hours and stress in Megapascals (MPa). The hardening
rules for load reversal described for the C6 = 9.0 standard Rational Polynomial creep equation are also
available.

3.17.2.6.3. Rational Polynomial Creep Equation with English Units (C4 = 2)

To use the above standard Rational Polynomial creep equation with English units, enter C4 = 2.0.

This standard rational polynomial equation is the same as described above except that temperatures
must be in °F, Toffset must be 460, and stress must be in psi. The equivalent valid temperature range is
700 - 1100°F.

3.17.2.7. Primary Explicit Creep Equation for C6 = 12

εɺ
r = N (M−1)
1σ
where:

C1 = Scaling constant
M, N, K = Function of temperature (determined by linear interpolation within table) as follows:

Constant Meaning
C5 Number of temperature values to describe
M, N, or K function (2 minimum, 6 maximum)
C49 First absolute temperature value
C50 Second absolute temperature value
...
C48 + C5 C5th absolute temperature value
C48 + C5 + 1 First M value
...

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
84 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Creep Equations

Constant Meaning
C48 + 2C5 C5th M value
C48 + 2C5 C5th M value
...
C48 + 2C5 C5th M value
C48 + 2C5 + 1 First N value
...
C48 + 3C5 C5th N value
C48 + 3C5 + 1 First K value
...

This power function creep law having temperature dependent coefficients is similar to Equation C6 =
1.0 except with C1 = f1(T), C2 = f2(T), C3 = f3(T), and C4 = 0. Temperatures must not be input in decreasing
order.

3.17.2.8. Primary Explicit Creep Equation for C6 Equals 13

Sterling Power Function:

εacc
εɺ cr =
εB
acc σ
A ( 3 A + 2B + C)

where:

εacc = creep strain accumulated to this time (calculated by the program). Internally set to 1 x
10-5 at the first substep with nonzero time to prevent division by zero.
A = C1/T
B = C2/T + C3
C = C4/T + C5

This equation is often referred to as the Sterling Power Function creep equation. Constant C7 should
be 0.0. Constant C1 should not be 0.0, unless no creep is to be calculated.

3.17.2.9. Primary Explicit Creep Equation for C6 = 14

∂ε
εɺ
= 1
∂

where:

εc = cpt/(1+pt) + εm
ɺ

ln c = -1.350 - 5620/T - 50.6 x 10-6 σ + 1.918 ln (σ/1000)

ln p = 31.0 - 67310/T + 330.6 x 10-6 σ - 1885.0 x 10-12 σ2
ln ε = 43.69 - 106400/T + 294.0 x 10-6 σ + 2.596 ln (σ/1000)
ɺ

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 85
Chapter 3: Material Models

This creep law is valid for Annealed 316 SS over a temperature range from 800°F to 1300°F. The equation
is similar to that given for C6 = 10.0 and is also described in High Alloy Steels.

To use equation, input C1 = 1.0 and C6 = 14.0. Temperatures should be in °R (or °F with Toffset = 460).
Time should be in hours. Constants are only valid for English units (pounds and inches). Valid temper-
ature range: 800° - 1300°F. Maximum stress allowed for ec calculation: 45,000 psi; minimum stress: 0.0
psi. If T + Toffset < 1160, no creep is computed.

3.17.2.10. Primary Explicit Creep Equation for C6 = 15

General Material Rational Polynomial:

∂εc
εɺ cr = 1
∂

where:

ε + + εɺ m
+
C3σ C4
εɺ
= 2 σ ( ust not be negative)


= 7 εɺ 8 σ9




= 0 εɺ  σ

This rational polynomial creep equation is a generalized form of the standard rational polynomial
equations given as C6 = 9.0, 10.0, and 11.0 (C4 = 1.0 and 2.0). This equation reduces to the standard
equations for isothermal cases. The hardening rules for load reversal described for the C6 = 9.0 standard
Rational Polynomial creep equation are also available.

3.17.2.11. Primary Explicit Creep Equation for C6 = 100

A user-defined creep equation is used. See the Guide to ANSYS User Programmable Features for more
information.

3.17.2.12. Secondary Explicit Creep Equation for C12 = 0

εɺ  =  σ /  − / T

where:

σ = equivalent stress
T = temperature (absolute). The offset temperature (from TOFFST), is internally added to all
temperatures for convenience.
t = time
e = natural logarithm base

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
86 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Swelling Model

3.17.2.13. Secondary Explicit Creep Equation for C12 = 1

εɺ cr = 7 σC8 −C10 / T

3.17.2.14. Irradiation Induced Explicit Creep Equation for C66 = 5

εɺ
= 55 σφɺ −φt.   + 6 σφɺ

where:

B = FG + C63
−
 
=
9 +  −
 

= − −φ  2
σ = equivalent stress
T = temperature (absolute). The offset temperature (from TOFFST) is internally added to all
temperatures for convenience.
Φt0.5 = neutron fluence (input on BF or BFE command)
e = natural logarithm base
t = time

This irradiation induced creep equation is valid for 20% Cold Worked 316 SS over a temperature range
from 700° to 1300°F. Constants 56, 57, 58 and 62 must be positive if the B term is included.

See Creep in the Structural Analysis Guide for more information on this material option.

3.18. Swelling Model

Swelling is a material enlargement (volume expansion) caused by neutron bombardment or other effects
(such as moisture). The swelling strain rate is generally nonlinear and is a function of factors such as
temperature, time, neutron flux level, stress, and moisture content.

Irradiation-induced swelling and creep apply to metal alloys that are exposed to nuclear radiation.
However, the swelling equations and the fluence input may be completely unrelated to nuclear swelling.
You can also model other types of swelling behavior, such as moisture-induced volume expansion.

Swelling strain is modeled using additive decomposition of strains, expressed as:

εɺ = εɺ el + εɺ pl + εɺ  + εɺ sw

where ε is the total mechanical strain, εel is the elastic strain, εpl is the plastic strain, and εsw is the
swelling strain.

You can combine swelling strain with other material models such as plasticity and creep; however, you
can use swelling with any hyperelasticity or anisotropic hyperelasticity material model.

Irradiation-induced swelling is generally accompanied by irradiation creep for metals and composites,
such as silicon carbide (SiC). The irradiation-induced swelling strain rate may depend on temperature,
time, fluence (the flux x time), and stress, such as:

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 87
Chapter 3: Material Models

εɺ sw εsw ( Φt σ)

where t is time, T is the temperature, Φt is the fluence, and σ is the stress. Temperatures used in the
swelling equations should be based on an absolute scale (TOFFST). Specify temperature and fluence
values via the BF or BFE command.

The following options for modeling swelling are available:

• Linear swelling defines swelling strain rate as a function of fluence rate, expressed as:

εɺ
Φ
ɺ


where C is the swelling constant, which may depend on temperature.

• Exponential swelling defines swelling strain as a function of fluence, expressed as:

ε 1+ 2Φ  + 3  − 4 Φ  − 

• A user-defined swelling option is available if you wish to create your own swelling function. For more
information, see userswstrain in the Guide to ANSYS User Programmable Features.

Swelling equations are material-specific and are empirical in nature.

For highly nonlinear swelling strain vs. fluence curves, it is good practice to use a small fluence step for
better accuracy and solution stability. If time is changing, a constant flux requires a linearly changing
fluence (because the swelling model uses fluence [Φt] rather than flux [Φ]).

Initialize the swelling table (TB,SWELL) with the desired data table option (TBOPT), as follows:

Swelling Model Options (TB,SWELL,,TBOPT)

Option (TBOPT) Constant Description Constant Value Input
LINE C1 Linear swelling TBDATA,1,C1
EXPT C1, C2, C3, C4 Exponential swelling TBDATA,1,C1,C2,C3,C4
USER C1, ..., Cn User-defined TBDATA,1,C1,C2,…

Issue the TBDATA command to enter the swelling table constants (up to six per command), as shown
in the table.

For a list of the elements that you can use with the swelling model, see "Element Support for Material
Models"

For more information about this material model, see Swelling in the Structural Analysis Guide.

3.19. Shape Memory Alloy (SMA) Material Model

A shape memory alloy (SMA) is a metallic alloy that “remembers” its original shape. Upon loading and
unloading cycles, an SMA can undergo large deformation without showing residual strains
(pseudoelasticity effect, also often called superelasticity), and can recover its original shape through
thermal cycles (the shape memory effect).

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
88 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Shape Memory Alloy (SMA) Material Model

Such distinct material behavior is due to the material microstructure in which there exists two different
crystallographic structures, one characterized by austenite (A), and another one by martensite (M).
Austenite is the crystallographically more-ordered phase, and martensite is the crystallographically less-
ordered phase. The key characteristic of an SMA is the occurrence of a martensitic phase transformation.

Typically, the austenite is stable at high temperatures and low stress, while the martensite is stable at
low temperatures and high stress. The reversible martensitic phase transformation results in unique
effects: the pseudoelasticity (PE) and the shape memory effect (SME).

As shown by (a) in the following figure, whenever σL is positive, the specimen recovers its original shape
completely and returns to a stress-free configuration (PE).

Figure 3.5 Pseudoelasticity (PE) and Shape Memory Effect (SME)

(a) PE -- High Temperature

(b) SME -- Low Temperature

As shown by (b) in the figure, when σL is negative, residual strains (E and E') can be observed after un-
loading into a stress-free configuration. If the material is heated, then eventually σL becomes positive;
however, the admissible configuration under a stress-free state points to A. The material therefore un-
dergoes an inverse transformation process (SME).

Nitinol

A typical shape memory alloy is Nitinol, a nickel titanium (Ni-Ti) alloy discovered in the 1960s at
the U.S. Naval Ordnance Laboratory (NOL). The acronym NiTi-NOL (or Nitinol) has since been
commonly used when referring to Ni-Ti-based shape memory alloys.

Two SMA material model options (accessed via TB,SMA) are available, one for simulating superelastic
behavior and the other for simulating the shape memory effect behavior of shape memory alloys.

The material option for superelasticity is based on Auricchio et al. [1 (p. 97)] in which the material un-
dergoes large-deformation without showing permanent deformation under isothermal conditions, as
shown by (a) in Figure 3.5 (p. 89). The material option for the shape memory effect is based on the 3-
D thermomechanical model for stress-induced solid phase transformations [2 (p. 97)] [3 (p. 97)] [4 (p. 97)].

The following shape memory alloy topics are available:

3.19.1. Shape Memory Alloy Model for Superelasticity
3.19.2. Shape Memory Material Model with Shape Memory Effect

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 89
Chapter 3: Material Models

3.19.3. Element Support for SMA

3.19.4. Learning More About Shape Memory Alloy

3.19.1. Shape Memory Alloy Model for Superelasticity

The following topics are available for the SMA superelasticity option:
3.19.1.1. Constitutive Model for Superelasticity
3.19.1.2. Material Parameters for the Superelastic SMA Material Model

3.19.1.1. Constitutive Model for Superelasticity

From a macroscopic perspective, the phase-transformation mechanisms involved in superelastic beha-
vior are:

1. Austenite to martensite (A->S)

2. Martensite to austenite (S->A)
3. Martensite reorientation (S->S)

Figure 3.6 Typical Superelasticity Behavior

Two of the phase transformations are considered here: A->S and S->A. The material is composed of
two phases, the austenite (A) and the martensite (S). Two internal variables, the martensite fraction (ξS)
and the austenite fraction (ξA), are introduced. One of them is a dependent variable, and they are assumed
to satisfy the relation expressed as:

ξS + ξ A =

The independent internal variable chosen here is ξS.

The material behavior is assumed to be isotropic. The pressure dependency of the phase transformation
is modeled by introducing the Drucker-Prager loading function, as follows:

= + α

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
90 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Shape Memory Alloy (SMA) Material Model

=σ

= σ

where α is the material parameter, σ is the stress, and 1 is the identity tensor.

The evolution of the martensite fraction, ξS, is then defined as follows:

 AS ɺ
− −ξ →
transormation
− AS

ξɺ S =  f
 SA ξ ɺ

→ trransormation
 S SA
 − f

where:

  + α
 = σ

 = σ + α
 

σ
  d σ

are the material parameters shown in the following figure:

where

Figure 3.7 Idealized Stress-Strain Diagram of Superelastic Behavior

σ
∫
σ
σ
σ
∫
ε
εL

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 91
Chapter 3: Material Models

  AS < < AS

AS  i ɺ
f

=  >

 otherwise

   < < 


  ɺ  

=  <

 




= σ +α

σ and σ



σ  σ


where are the material parameters shown in Figure 3.7 (p. 91).

The material parameter α characterizes the material response in tension and compression. If tensile and
compressive behaviors are the same, then α = 0. For a uniaxial tension-compression test, α can be related
to the initial value of austenite to martensite phase transformation in tension and compression
σc  σ 
( , respectively) as:

σ!"# − σ $"#
α=
σ!"# + σ $"#

The stress-strain relation is:

σ= ε − ε %&

ɺ '( = ξɺ ∂
L
∂σ

)* +
where D is the elastic stiffness tensor, is the transformation strain tensor, and is the material
parameter shown in Figure 3.7 (p. 91).

3.19.1.2. Material Parameters for the Superelastic SMA Material Model

To model the superelastic behavior of shape memory alloys, initialize the data table using the TB,SMA
command's SUPE option.

Define the elastic behavior in the austenite state (MP).

The superelastic SMA option is described by six constants that define the stress-strain behavior in
loading and unloading for the uniaxial stress-state.

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
92 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Shape Memory Alloy (SMA) Material Model

For each data set, define the temperature (TBTEMP), then define constants C1 through C6 (TBDATA).
You can define up to 99 sets of temperature-dependent constants in this manner.

Table 3.3 Superelastic Option Constants

Constant Meaning Property

σsAS
C1 Starting stress value for the forward
phase transformation

σf

C2 Final stress value for the forward phase
transformation

σ
C3 Starting stress value for the reverse
 phase transformation

σ
C4 Final stress value for the reverse phase
 transformation
C5 Maximum residual strain
L
C6 α Parameter measuring the difference
between material responses in tension
and compression

Example 3.2 Defining Elastic Properties of the Austenite Phase

MP,EX,1,60000.0
MP,NUXY,1,0.36
Define SMA material properties
TB,SMA,1,,,SUPE
TBDATA,1, 520, 600, 300, 200, 0.07, 0.0

3.19.2. Shape Memory Material Model with Shape Memory Effect

The following topics concerning SMA and the shape memory effect are available:
3.19.2.1.The Constitutive Model for Shape Memory Effect
3.19.2.2. Material Parameters for the Shape Memory Effect Option

3.19.2.1. The Constitutive Model for Shape Memory Effect

The shape memory effect was based on a 3-D thermomechanical model for stress-induced solid phase
transformations that was presented in [1 (p. 97)] [2 (p. 97)] [3 (p. 97)]. Within the framework of classical
irreversible thermodynamics, the model is able to reproduce all of the primary features relative to shape
memory materials in a 3-D stress state. The free energy potential is set to:

2
Ψε ε tr = ( ε − ε tr ) ( ε − ε tr ) + τM ( ) ε'tr + ε'tr + Ι ε

( ε'tr )
where:

D = material elastic stiffness tensor

= total strain
 = total transformation strain

 = deviatoric transformation strain

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 93
Chapter 3: Material Models

τM(T) = a positive and monotonically increasing function of the temperature as 〈β(T - T0)〉+ in which
〈·〉+ is the positive part of the argument (also known as Maxwell stress).
β = material parameter
T = temperature
T0 = temperature below which no twinned martensite is observed
h = material parameter related to the hardening of the material during the phase transformation

ε'tr ( ) = indicator function introduced to satisfy the constraint on the transformation norm


[1 (p. 97)] in which

 ≤ ε ≤ εL
Ι ε ( ε ) = 



+∞


from which we have

∂ψ
σ=
∂ε

∂ψ

∈−
∂ε

where Xtr is defined as the transformation stress.

Stresses, strains, and the transformation strains are then related as follows:

σ= (ε − ε ) 

Splitting the stress into deviatoric and volumetric components, we have

=σ−

= σ

where S is the deviatoric stress and p is the volumetric stress (also called hydrostatic pressure)

The transformation stress is given as follows:

ε

= −  τM ( )+ ε + γ  
ε

where γ is defined by

 ≤ ε < ε

³ =
≥ ε = ε


Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
94 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Shape Memory Alloy (SMA) Material Model

where L
is a maximum transformation strain.

Numerous experimental tests show an asymmetric behavior of SMA in tension and compression, and
suggest describing SMA as an isotropic material with a Prager-Lode-type limit surface. Accordingly, the
following yield function is assumed:

tr
= 2
+ 3
−
2

where Xtr is the transformation stress, J2 and J3 are the second and third invariants of transformation
stress, m is a material parameter related to Lode dependency, and R is the elastic domain radius.

J2 and J3 are defined as follows:


= ( 

)


= ( 
 )
The evolution of transformation strain is defined as:

∂
εɺ  = ξε
ɺ

∂σ

where ξ is an internal variable and is called as transformation strain multiplier. ξ and F(Xtr) must satisfy
the classical Kuhn-Tucker conditions, as follows:
ξɺ ≥
ξɺ (
)=

which also reduces the problem to a constrained optimization problem.

The elastic properties of austenite and martensite phase differ. During the transformation phase, the
elastic stiffness tensor of material varies with the deformation. The elastic stiffness tensor L is therefore

assumed to be a function of the transformation strain 

, defined as:

ε' 
= ( S
− A )+ A
ε

where DA is the elastic stiffness tensor of austenite phase, and DS is the elastic stiffness tensor of
martensite phase. The Poisson’s ratio of the austenite phase is assumed to be the same as the
martensite phase. When the material is in its austenite phase, D = DA, and when the material undergoes
full transformation (martensite phase), D = DS.

The following figure illustrates a number of the mechanical model features:

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 95
Chapter 3: Material Models

Figure 3.8 Admissible Paths for Elastic Behavior and Phase Transformations

The austenite phase is associated with the horizontal region abcd. Mixtures of phases are related to the
surface cdef. The martensite phase is represented by the horizontal region efgh. Point c corresponds
to the nucleation of the martensite phase. Phase transformations take place only along line cf, where
3 =
tr + 2
tr . Saturated phase transformations are represented by paths on line fg. The horizontal
region efgh contains elastic processes except, of course, those on line fg.

A backward Euler integration scheme is used to solve the stress update and the consistent tangent
stiffness matrix required by the finite element solution for obtaining a robust nonlinear solution.

3.19.2.2. Material Parameters for the Shape Memory Effect Option

To model the shape memory effect behavior of shape memory alloys, initialize the data table using the
TB,SMA command’s MEFF option.

Define the elastic behavior in the austenite state (MP).

The shape memory effect option is described by seven constants that define the stress-strain behavior
of material in loading and unloading cycles for the uniaxial stress-state and thermal loading.

For each data set, define the temperature (TBTEMP), then define constants C1 through C7 (TBDATA).
You can define up to 99 sets of temperature-dependent constants in this manner.

Table 3.4 Shape Memory Effect Option Constants

Con- Mean- Property
stant ing
C1 h Hardening parameter
C2 To Reference temperature
C3 R Elastic limit

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
96 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 MPC184 Joint Material Models

Con- Mean- Property

stant ing
C4 β Temperature scaling parameter
C5 Maximum transformation strain
L

C6 Em Martensite modulus
C7 m Lode dependency parameter

Example 3.3 Defining Shape Memory Effect Properties of the Austenite Phase
MP,EX,1,60000.0
MP,NUXY,1,0.36
Define SMA material properties
TB,SMA,1,,,MEFF
TBDATA,1,1000, 223, 50, 2.1, 0.04, 45000
TBDATA,7,0.05

3.19.3. Element Support for SMA

Support for SMA material models is available only with current-technology plane, solid, and solid-shell
elements where 3-D stress states are applicable (including 3-D solid elements, solid-shell elements, 2-
D plane strain, axisymmetric elements, and solid pipe elements).

3.19.4. Learning More About Shape Memory Alloy

A considerable body of literature exists concerning shape memory alloy material models. The following
list of resources offers a wealth of information but is by no means exhaustive:

1. Auricchio, F. “A Robust Integration-Algorithm for a Finite-Strain Shape-Memory-Alloy.” International

Journal of Plasticity. 17 (2001): 971-990.
2. Souza, A. C., E. N. Mamiya, N. Zouain. “Three-Dimensional Model for Solids Undergoing Stress-Induced
Phase Transformations.” European Journal of Mechanics-A/Solids . 17 (1998): 789-806.
3. Auricchio, F., R. L. Taylor, J. Lubliner. “Shape-Memory Alloys: Macromodeling and Numerical Simulations
of the Superelastic Behavior.” Computational Methods in Applied Mechanical Engineering. 146, 1 (1997):
281-312.
4. Auricchio, F., L. Petrini. “Improvements and Algorithmical Considerations on a Recent Three-Dimensional
Model Describing Stress-Induced Solid Phase Transformations.” International Journal for Numerical
Methods in Engineering. 55 (2005): 1255-1284.
5. Auricchio, F., D. Fugazza, R. DesRoches. “Numerical and Experimental Evaluation of the Damping
Properties of Shape-Memory Alloys.” Journal of Engineering Materials and Technology. 128:3 (2006): 312-
319.

3.20. MPC184 Joint Material Models

The TB,JOIN option allows you to impose linear and nonlinear elastic stiffness and damping behavior
or Coulomb friction behavior on the available components of relative motion of an MPC184 joint element.
The stiffness and damping behaviors described here apply to all joint elements except the weld, orient,
and spherical joints. The Coulomb friction behavior described here applies only to the revolute, slot,
and translational joints.

The TB command may be repeated with the same material ID number to specify both the stiffness and
damping behavior.

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 97
Chapter 3: Material Models

The following joint material models are available:

3.20.1. Linear Elastic Stiffness and Damping Behavior
3.20.2. Nonlinear Elastic Stiffness and Damping Behavior
3.20.3. Frictional Behavior

3.20.1. Linear Elastic Stiffness and Damping Behavior

Input the linear stiffness or damping behavior for the relevant components of relative motion of a joint
element by specifying the terms as part of a 6 x 6 matrix with data table commands as described below.

The 6 x 6 matrix for linear stiffness or damping behavior is as follows:

 11 
 
 21 22 
 31 32 33 
 
 41 42 43 44 
 51 52 53 54 55

 
 61 62 63 64 65 66 

Enter the stiffness or damping coefficient of the matrix in the data table with TB set of commands.
Initialize the constant table with TB,JOIN,,,STIF (for stiffness behavior) or TB,JOIN,,,DAMP (for damping
behavior). Define the temperature with TBTEMP, followed by the relevant constants input with TBDATA
commands. Matrix terms are linearly interpolated between temperature points. Based on the joint type,
the relevant constant specification is as follows:

Joint Element Constant Meaning

x-axis Revolute joint C16 Term D44
z-axis Revolute joint C21 Term D66
Universal joint C16, C18, C21 Terms D44, D64, D66
Slot joint C1 Term D11
Point-in-plane joint C7, C8, C12 Terms D22, D32, D33
Translational joint C1 Term D11
x-axis Cylindrical joint C1, C4, C16 Terms D11, D41, D44
z-axis Cylindrical joint C12, C15, C21 Terms D33, D63, D66
x-axis Planar joint C7, C8, C9, C12, C13, C16 Terms D22, D32, D42, D33, D43, D44
z-axis Planar joint C1, C2, C6, C7, C11, C21 Terms D11, D21, D61, D22, D62, D66
General joint Use appropriate entries based on ---
unconstrained degrees of freedom.
Screw joint C12, C15, C21 Terms D33, D63, D66

The following example shows how you would define the uncoupled linear elastic stiffness behavior for
a universal joint at the two available components of relative motion, with two temperature points:
TB,JOIN,1,2,,STIF ! Activate JOIN material model with linear elastic stiffness
TBTEMP,100.0 ! Define first temperature
TBDATA,16,D44 ! Define constant D44 in the local ROTX direction
TBDATA,21,D66 ! Define constant D66 in the local ROTZ direction
TBTEMP,200.0 ! Define second temperature
TBDATA,16,D44 ! Define constant D44 in the local ROTX direction.
TBDATA,21,D66 ! Define constant D66 in the local ROTZ direction.

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
98 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 MPC184 Joint Material Models

3.20.2. Nonlinear Elastic Stiffness and Damping Behavior

You can specify nonlinear elastic stiffness as a displacement (rotation) versus force (moment) curve using
the TB,JOIN command with a suitable TBOPT setting.

Use the TBPT command to specify the data points or specify the name of a function that defines the
curve on the TB command. (Use the Function Tool to generate the specified function.) The values may
be temperature-dependent.

You can specify nonlinear damping behavior in a similar manner by supplying velocity versus damping
force (or moment).

The appropriate TBOPT labels for each joint element type are shown in the following tables. For a de-
scription of each TBOPT label, see JOIN Specifications in the TB command documentation.

Nonlinear Stiffness Behavior

Joint Element TBOPT on TB command
x-axis Revolute joint JNSA, JNS4
z-axis Revolute joint JNSA, JNS6
Universal joint JNSA, JNS4, and JNS6
Slot joint JNSA and JNS1
Point-in-plane joint JNSA, JNS2, and JNS3
Translational joint JNSA and JNS1
x-axis Cylindrical joint JNSA, JNS1, and JNS4
z-axis Cylindrical joint JNSA, JNS3, and JNS6
x-axis Planar joint JNSA, JNS2, JNS3, and JNS4
z-axis Planar joint JNSA, JNS1, JNS2, and JNS6
General joint Use appropriate entries based on
unconstrained degrees of freedom
Screw joint JNSA, JNS3, and JNS6

Nonlinear Damping Behavior

Joint Element TBOPT on TB command
x-axis Revolute joint JNDA, JND4
z-axis Revolute joint JNDA, JND6
Universal joint JNDA, JND4, and JND6
Slot joint JNDA and JND1
Point-in-plane joint JNDA, JND2, and JND3
Translational joint JNDA and JND1
x-axis Cylindrical joint JNDA, JND1, and JND4
z-axis Cylindrical joint JNDA, JND3, and JND6
x-axis Planar joint JNDA, JND2, JND3, and JND4
z-axis Planar joint JNDA, JND1, JND2, and JND6

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 99
Chapter 3: Material Models

Nonlinear Damping Behavior

Joint Element TBOPT on TB command
General joint Use appropriate entries based on
unconstrained degrees of freedom
Screw joint JNDA, JND3, and JND6

The following example illustrates the specification of nonlinear stiffness behavior for a revolute joint
that has only one available component of relative motion (the rotation around the axis of revolution).
Two temperature points are specified.
TB,JOIN,1,2,2,JNS4
TBTEMP,100.
TBPT,,rotation_value_1,moment_value_1
TBPT,,rotation_value_2,moment_value_2
TBTEMP,200.0
TBPT,,rotation_value_1,moment_value_1
TBPT,,rotation_value_2,moment_value_2

3.20.2.1. Specifying a Function Describing Nonlinear Stiffness Behavior

When specifying a function that describes the nonlinear stiffness behavior, the Function Tool allows
the force to be defined as a function of temperature and relative displacement; the two independent
variables are named as TEMP and DJU. Similarly, when specifying a function that describes the nonlinear
damping behavior, the Function Tool allows the damping force to be defined as a function of temper-
ature and relative velocity; the two independent variables are identified as TEMP and DJV.

Example Consider a function where the damping force varies with temperature and relative velocity:

F = (-0.005 * Temperature + 0.25) * Relative Velocity

Define the function using the Function Editor, then retrieve and load it using the Function Loader. (The
editor and the loader are both components of the Function Tool.)

Assuming a function name of dampfunc, you can then use the TB command to define the joint mater-
ial:
TB, JOIN, 1, , , JND4, , %dampfunc%

For more information about the Function Tool utility, see "Using the Function Tool" in the Basic Analysis
Guide.

3.20.3. Frictional Behavior

Frictional behavior along the unrestrained components of relative motion influences the overall beha-
vior of the Joints. You can model Coulomb friction for joint elements via the TB,JOIN command with
an appropriate TBOPT label. The joint frictional behavior can be specified only for the following joints:
Revolute joint, Slot joint, and Translational joint.

The friction parameters are described below.

Coulomb Friction Coefficient Specification

There are three options for defining the Coulomb friction coefficient.

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
100 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 MPC184 Joint Material Models

• Define a single value of the Coulomb friction coefficient by specifying TBOPT = MUSx, where the value
of x depends on the joint under consideration. Use the TBDATA command to specify the value of the
friction coefficient.
• Define the Coulomb friction coefficient as a function of the sliding velocity. Use TBOPT = MUSx (as
stated above) and use the TBPT command to specify the data values.
• Use the exponential law for friction behavior. Specify TBOPT = EXPx, where the value of x depends on
the joint under consideration, and use the TBDATA command to specify the values required for the
exponential law. In this case, the TBDATA command format is:

TBDATA, µs, µd, c

where µs is the coefficient of friction in the static regime, µd is the coefficient of friction in the dy-
namic regime, and c is the decay coefficient.

Maximum or Critical Force/Moment

• The maximum allowable value of critical force/moment can be specified using TBOPT = TMXx, where
x depends on the joint under consideration.

Elastic Slip

• The elastic slip can be specified by setting TBOPT = SLx, where x depends on the joint under consid-
eration.
• If the stick-stiffness value is not specified, then this value along with the critical force/moment is used
to determine the stick-stiffness.
• If the elastic slip is not specified, then a default value is computed for stick-stiffness calculations if ne-
cessary.

Stick-Stiffness

• A stick-stiffness value can be specified for controlling the behavior in the stick regime when friction
behavior is specified. Use TBOPT = SKx, where x depends on the joint under consideration.
• If the stick-stiffness value is not specified, then the following procedure is adopted:
– If both maximum force/moment and elastic slip are specified, then the stick-stiffness is calculated
from these values.
– If only maximum force/moment is specified, then a default elastic slip is computed and then the
stick-stiffness is calculated.
– If only the elastic slip is specified, then the stick-stiffness value is computed based on the current
normal force/moment (Friction Coefficient * Normal Force or Moment/elastic-slip).

Interference Fit Force/Moment

• If the forces that are generated during a joint assembly have to be modeled, the interference fit
force/moment can be specified using TBOPT = FIx, where x depends on the joint under consideration.
This force/moment will contribute to the normal force/moment in friction calculations.

The appropriate TBOPT labels (TB command) for each joint element type are shown in the table below:

TBOPT Labels for Elements Supporting Coulomb Friction

Friction Paramet- x-axis Revolute z-axis Revolute Translational
Slot Joint
er Joint Joint Joint

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 101
Chapter 3: Material Models

Static Friction MUS4 MUS6 MUS1 MUS1

Exponential Fric- EXP4 EXP6 EXP1 EXP1
tion Law
Max. Allowable TMX4 TMX6 TMX1 TMX1
Shear Force/Mo-
ment
Elastic Slip SL4 SL6 SL1 SL1
Interference Fit FI4 FI6 FI1 FI1
Force/Moment
Stick-Stiffness SK4 SK6 SK1 SK1

The following examples illustrate how to specify Coulomb friction parameters for various scenarios.

Example 1 Specifying a single value of coefficient of friction and other friction parameters for an x-
axis revolute joint.
TB, JOIN, 1, , , MUS4 ! Label for friction coefficient
TBDATA, 1, 0.1 ! Value of coefficient of friction
TB, JOIN, 1, , , SK4 ! Label for stick-stiffness
TBDATA, 1, 3.0E4 ! Value for stick-stiffness
TB, JOIN, 1, , , FI4 ! Label for interference fit force
TBDATA, 1, 10000.00 ! Value for interference fit force

Example 2 Specifying temperature dependent friction coefficient and other friction parameters for
a z-axis revolution joint.
TB, JOIN, 1,2 , 1, MUS6 ! 2 temp points, 2 data points and label for friction coefficient
TBTEMP, 10 ! 1st temperature
TBDATA, 1, 0.15 ! Value of coefficient of friction
TBTEMP, 20 ! 2nd temperature
TBDATA, 1, 0.1 ! Value of coefficient of friction
!
TB, JOIN, 1, , , SK4 ! Label for stick-stiffness
TBDATA, 1, 3.0E4 ! Value for stick-stiffness
TB, JOIN, 1, , , FI4 ! Label for interference fit force
TBDATA, 1, 10000.00 ! Value for interference fit force

Example 3 Specifying the exponential law for friction and other friction parameters for a z-axis revolute
joint.
TB, JOIN, 1, , , EXP6 ! Label for friction coefficient
TBDATA, 1, 0.4, 0.2, 0.5 ! Static friction coeff, dynamic friction coeff, decay constant
!
TB, JOIN, 1, , , SK6 ! Label for stick-stiffness
TBDATA, 1, 3.0E4 ! Value for stick-stiffness

Example 4 Specifying friction as a function of sliding velocity for a slot joint.

TB, JOIN, 1, , 3, MUS1 ! Label for friction coefficient
TBPT, , 1.0, 0.15 ! Sliding velocity, coefficient of friction
TBPT, , 5.0, 0.10 ! Sliding velocity, coefficient of friction
TBPT, , 10.0, 0.09 ! Sliding velocity, coefficient of friction
!
TB, JOIN, 1, , , TMX1 ! Label for max allowable frictional force
TBDATA, 1, 3.0E4 ! Value for max allowable frictional force
TB, JOIN, 1, , , SL1 ! Label for elastic slip
TBDATA, 1, 0.04 ! Value of elastic slip

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
102 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Contact Friction

3.21. Contact Friction

Contact friction (TB,FRIC) is a material property used with current-technology contact elements. It can
be specified either through the coefficient of friction (MU) for isotropic or orthotropic friction models
or as user defined friction properties.

3.21.1. Isotropic Friction

Isotropic friction is applicable to 2-D and 3-D contact and is available for all contact elements. Use the
TB,FRIC command with TBOPT = ISO to define isotropic friction, and specify the coefficient of friction
MU on the TBDATA command. This is the recommended method for defining isotropic friction.

To define a coefficient of friction that is dependent on temperature, time, normal pressure, sliding dis-
tance, or sliding relative velocity, use the TBFIELD command. Suitable combinations of up to two fields
can be used to define dependency, for example, temperature and sliding distance as shown below:
TB,FRIC,1,,,ISO ! Activate isotropic friction model
TBFIELD,TEMP,100.0 ! Define first value of temperature
TBFIELD,SLDI,0.1 ! Define first value of sliding distance
TBDATA,1,MU ! Define coefficient of friction
TBFIELD,SLDI,0.5 ! Define second value of sliding distance
TBDATA,1,MU ! Define coefficient of friction
TBFIELD,TEMP,200.0 ! Define second value of temperature
TBFIELD,SLDI,0.2 ! Define first value of sliding distance
TBDATA,1,MU ! Define coefficient of friction
TBFIELD,SLDI,0.7 ! Define second value of sliding distance
TBDATA,1,MU ! Define coefficient of friction

See Understanding Field Variable Interpolation (p. 155) for more information on the interpolation scheme
used for field-dependent material properties defined using TBFIELD.

To define a coefficient of friction that is dependent on temperature only, use the TBTEMP command
as shown below:
TB,FRIC,1,2,,ISO ! Activate isotropic friction model
TBTEMP,100.0 ! Define first temperature
TBDATA,1,MU ! Define coefficient of friction at temp 100.0
TBTEMP,200.0 ! Define second temperature
TBDATA,1,MU ! Define coefficient of friction at temp 200.0

Alternatively, you can use MU on the MP command to specify the isotropic friction. Use the MPTEMP
command to define MU as a function of temperature. See Linear Material Properties (p. 14) for details.

3.21.2. Orthotropic Friction

The orthotropic friction model uses two different coefficients of friction in two principal directions (see
Frictional Model in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for details). It is applicable only to 3-D contact
and is available for current-technology contact elements.

Issue the TB,FRIC command with TBOPT = ORTHO to define orthotropic friction, and specify the coeffi-
cients of friction, MU1 and MU2, on the TBDATA command.

To define a coefficient of friction that is dependent on temperature, time, normal pressure, sliding dis-
tance, or sliding relative velocity, use the TBFIELD command. Suitable combinations of up to two fields
can be used to define dependency, for example, sliding relative velocity and normal pressure as shown
below:
TB,FRIC,1,,,ORTHO ! Activate orthotropic friction model
TBFIELD,SLRV,10.0 ! Define first value of sliding relative velocity

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 103
Chapter 3: Material Models

TBFIELD,NPRE,200.0 ! Define first value of normal pressure

TBDATA,1,MU1,MU2 ! Define coefficients of friction
TBFIELD,NPRE,250.0 ! Define second value of normal pressure
TBDATA,1,MU1,MU2 ! Define coefficients of friction
TBFIELD,SLRV,20.0 ! Define second value of sliding relative velocity
TBFIELD,NPRE,150.0 ! Define first value of normal pressure
TBDATA,1,MU1,MU2 ! Define coefficients of friction
TBFIELD,NPRE,300.0 ! Define second value of normal pressure
TBDATA,1,MU1,MU2 ! Define coefficients of friction

See Understanding Field Variable Interpolation (p. 155) for more information on the interpolation scheme
used for field-dependent material properties defined using TBFIELD.

To define a coefficient of friction that is dependent on temperature only, use the TBTEMP command
as shown below:
TB,FRIC,1,2,,ORTHO ! Activate orthotropic friction model
TBTEMP,100.0 ! Define first temperature
TBDATA,1,MU1,MU2 ! Define coefficients of friction at temp 100.0
TBTEMP,200.0 ! Define second temperature
TBDATA,1,MU1,MU2 ! Define coefficients of friction at temp 200.0

3.21.3. Redefining Friction Between Load Steps

If the friction behavior changes between initial loading and secondary loading (for example, during
cyclic loading of seabed pipelines), you can reissue the TB,FRIC command between load steps to define
new values for the coefficient of friction. This is true for both temperature-dependent friction (isotropic
or orthotropic) defined via the TBTEMP command and field-dependent friction (isotropic or orthotropic)
defined via the TBFIELD command. The following example shows the latter case:
TB,FRIC,1,,,ORTHO !Activate orthotropic friction model
TBFIELD,SLDI,0. !Define initial curve for coefficient of friction
TBDATA,1,0.0,0.0
TBFIELD,SLDI,0.25
TBDATA,1,0.0,1.25
TBFIELD,SLDI,0.5
TBDATA,1,0.0,1.0
TBFIELD,SLDI,20.
TBDATA,1,0.0,1.1

/SOLUTION
!* LOAD STEP 1
...
TIME,1
SOLVE

TB,FRIC,1,,,ORTHO !Activate orthotropic friction model

TBFIELD,SLDI,0. !Define secondary curve for coefficient of friction
TBDATA,1,0.0,20.0
TBFIELD,SLDI,1.1
TBFIELD,SLDI,20.25
TBDATA,1,0.0,0.0
TBFIELD,SLDI,20.5
TBDATA,1,0.0,0.8
TBFIELD,SLDI,21
TBDATA,1,0.0,0.7
TBFIELD,SLDI,35
TBDATA,1,0.0,0.75

!* LOAD STEP 2
...
TIME,2
SOLVE

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
104 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Cohesive Zone Material Model

3.21.4. User-Defined Friction

You can define your own friction model with the user programmable friction subroutine USERFRIC.
(See the Guide to ANSYS User Programmable Features for a detailed description of the USERFRIC sub-
routine.) User-defined friction is applicable to 2-D and 3-D contact and is available for current-technology
contact elements.

The USERFRIC subroutine can only be used with penalty-based tangential contact (KEYOPT(2) = 0, 1,
or 3 on the contact element).

To specify user-defined friction, use the TB,FRIC command with TBOPT = USER and specify the friction
properties on the TBDATA command, as shown below. Also, use the USERFRIC subroutine to program
the friction model.
TB,FRIC,1,,2,USER ! Activate user defined friction model
TBDATA,1,PROP1,PROP2 ! Define friction properties

Field variables specified with the TBFIELD command are not available for TB,FRIC,,,,USER.

3.22. Cohesive Zone Material Model

Cohesive zone materials can be used with interface elements (INTERnnn) and contact elements (CON-
TAnnn), as described here:
3.22.1. Exponential Cohesive Zone Material for Interface Elements
3.22.2. Bilinear Cohesive Zone Material for Interface Elements
3.22.3. Cohesive Zone Material for Contact Elements

For more detailed information about cohesive zone materials, see Cohesive Zone Material (CZM) Model
in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference.

3.22.1. Exponential Cohesive Zone Material for Interface Elements

The interface elements allow exponential cohesive zone materials to be used for simulating interface
delamination and other fracture phenomena. To define exponential material behavior, issue the
TB,CZM,,,,EXPO command, then specify the following material constants via the TBDATA command:

Con- Mean- Property

stant ing
C1 σmax Maximum normal traction at the interface
C2 δn Normal separation across the interface where
the maximum normal traction is attained
C3 δt Shear separation where the maximum shear
traction is attained

To define a temperature dependent material, use the TBTEMP command as shown below:
TB,CZM,1,2,,EXPO ! Activate exponential material model
TBTEMP,100.0 ! Define first temperature
TBDATA,1, max, n, t ! Define material constants at temp 100.0
TBTEMP,200.0 ! Define second temperature
TBDATA,1, max, n, t ! Define material constants at temp 200.0

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 105
Chapter 3: Material Models

3.22.2. Bilinear Cohesive Zone Material for Interface Elements

The interface elements allow bilinear cohesive zone materials to be used for simulating interface
delamination and other fracture phenomena. To define bilinear material behavior, issue the TB,CZM,,,,BILI
command, then specify the following material constants via the TBDATA command:

Con- Mean- Property

stant ing
C1 σmax Maximum normal traction
C2 Normal displacement jump at the completion
δnc
of debonding
C3 τmax Maximum tangential traction
C4 Tangential displacement jump at the comple-
δt
tion of debonding
C5 α
δ
* δ δ δ
Ratio of to , or ratio of to
C6 β Non-dimensional weighting parameter

To define a temperature-dependent material, issue the TBTEMP command as shown in the following
example input fragment:
TB,CZM,1,2,,BILI ! Activate bilinear CZM material model
!
! Define first temperature
!
TBTEMP,100.0
!
! Define Mode I dominated material constants at temp 100.0:
!

δ δ
!TBDATA,1, max,  ,- max,
,
!
! Define second temperature
!
TBTEMP,200.0
TBTEMP,200.0
!
! Define Mode I dominated material constants at temp 200.0:

δ δ
TBDATA,1, max, ,- max, ,

Debonding Interface Modes

Three modes of interface debonding comprise bilinear CZM law:

Case Input on the TBDATA command as follows:

Mode I Dominated C1, C2, C3, C4, C5 (where C3 = -τmax)
Mode II Dominated C1, C2, C3, C4, C5 (where C1 = -σmax)
Mixed-Mode C1, C2, C3, C4, C5, C6 (where C1 = σmax and C3 = τmax)

3.22.3. Cohesive Zone Material for Contact Elements

To model interface delamination, also known as debonding, the contact elements support a cohesive
zone material model with bilinear behavior. This model allows two ways to specify material data.

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
106 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Cohesive Zone Material Model

Bilinear Material Behavior with Tractions and Separation Distances

To define bilinear material behavior with tractions and separation distances, issue the TB,CZM,,,,CBDD
comman, then specify the following material constants via the TBDATA command:

Con- Mean- Property

stant ing
C1 σmax Maximum normal contact stress
C2 Contact gap at the completion of debonding
δnc

C3 τmax Maximum equivalent tangential contact

stress
C4 Tangential slip at the completion of debond-
δt
ing
C5 η Artificial damping coefficient
C6 β Flag for tangential slip under compressive
normal contact stress

To define a temperature dependent material, use the TBTEMP command as shown below:
TB,CZM,1,2,,CBDD ! Activate bilinear material model with tractions
! and separation distances
TBTEMP,100.0 ! Define first temperature

δ δ
TBDATA,1, max,
, max,  , , ! Define material constants at temp 100.0
TBTEMP,200.0 ! Define second temperature

δ δ
TBDATA,1, max,  , max,  , , ! Define material constants at temp 200.0

Bilinear Material Behavior with Tractions and Critical Fracture Energies

Use the TB,CZM command with TBOPT = CBDE to define bilinear material behavior with tractions and
critical fracture energies, and specify the following material constants using the TBDATA command.

Con- Mean- Property

stant ing
C1 σmax Maximum normal contact stress
C2 Gcn Critical fracture energy for normal separation
C3 τmax Maximum equivalent tangential contact stress
C4 Gct Critical fracture energy for tangential slip
C5 η Artificial damping coefficient
C6 β Fag for tangential slip under compressive
normal contact stress

To define a temperature dependent material, use the TBTEMP command as shown below:
TB,CZM,1,2,,CBDE ! Activate bilinear material model with
! tractions and facture energies
TBTEMP,100.0 ! Define first temperature
TBDATA,1, max,Gcn, max,Gct, , ! Define material constants at temp 100.0
TBTEMP,200.0 ! Define second temperature
TBDATA,1, max,Gcn, max,Gct, , ! Define material constants at temp 200.0

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 107
Chapter 3: Material Models

3.23. Fluid Material Models

Fluid material models can be used with hydrostatic fluid elements to model compressible fluids. For
theoretical background on these materials, see Fluid Material Models in the Mechanical APDL Theory
Reference. For more information on using these fluid material models with the hydrostatic fluid elements,
see "Modeling Hydrostatic Fluids" in the Structural Analysis Guide.

There are three ways to define material data for compressible fluids: liquid, gas, or pressure-volume
data.

Liquid

Use the TB,FLUID command with TBOPT = LIQUID to define material behavior for a liquid, and specify
the following material constants using the TBDATA command:

Con- Mean- Property

stant ing
C1 K Bulk modulus
C2 α Coefficient of thermal expansion
C3 ρ0f Initial density

You can define a temperature dependent liquid material with up to 20 temperatures (NTEMP = 20 max
on the TB command) by using the TBTEMP command, as shown in the example below:
TB,FLUID,1,2,,LIQUID ! Activate liquid material model
TBTEMP,100.0 ! Define first temperature
TBDATA,1,K, , 0f ! Define material constants at temp 100.0
TBTEMP,200.0 ! Define second temperature
TBDATA,1,K, , 0f ! Define material constants at temp 200.0

When specifying temperature dependent density values for a liquid, keep in mind that the current
density (ρf) for hydrostatic fluid elements is computed at each iteration as a function of pressure change
(∆P), bulk modulus (K), coefficient of thermal expansion (α), and temperature change (∆T). A reference
temperature may be input using the TREF or MP,REFT command. For details on how the current
density is calculated, refer to Liquid in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference.

Gas

Use the TB,FLUID command with TBOPT = GAS to define material behavior for a gas, and specify the
following material constant using the TBDATA command:

Con- Mean- Property

stant ing
C1 ρ0f Initial density

You can define a temperature dependent gas material with up to 20 temperatures (NTEMP = 20 max
on the TB command) by using the TBTEMP command, as shown in the example below:
TB,FLUID,1,2,,GAS ! Activate gas material model
TBTEMP,100.0 ! Define first temperature
TBDATA,1, 0f ! Define material constants at temp 100.0
TBTEMP,200.0 ! Define second temperature
TBDATA,1, 0f ! Define material constants at temp 200.0

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
108 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 User-Defined Material Model

When specifying temperature dependent density values for a gas, keep in mind that the current density
(ρf ) for hydrostatic fluid elements is computed at each iteration based on the Ideal Gas Law. For details
on how the current density is calculated, refer to Gas in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference.

To use the Ideal Gas Law, you also need to define a reference pressure (input as real constant PREF)
and a reference temperature (input with the TREF or MP,REFT command) with temperature offset (input
with the TOFFST command).

Pressure-Volume Data

Use the TB,FLUID command with TBOPT = PVDATA to define compressible fluid behavior in terms of
a pressure-volume curve. You can specify up to 20 temperature-dependent pressure-volume curves
(NTEMP = 20 max on the TB command). The temperature for the first curve is input with TBTEMP, fol-
lowed by TBPT commands for up to 100 pressure-volume data points. The data points (X, Y) entered
on TBPT are:

Con- Meaning
stant
X Pressure value
Y Corresponding volume
value

The pressure-volume data point must be defined in terms of total pressure and total volume of the
fluid in the containing vessel.

3.24. User-Defined Material Model

The User-Defined material option (TB,USER) describes input parameters for defining your own material
model via the UserMat subroutine, which defines any material type except incompressible materials.
The subroutine supports current-technology elements only. For more information, see Subroutine
UserMat (Creating Your Own Material Model) in the Guide to ANSYS User Programmable Features.

Input for the user-defined option is determined by constants which you define. The TB,USER command
initializes the constant table. The constants are defined via TBDATA commands (six per command). The
number of constants can be any combination of the number of temperatures (NTEMP) and the number
of data points per temperature (NPTS), to a maximum of NTEMP x NPTS = 1000.

Example 3.4 Input for a User-Defined Material

TB,USER,1,2,4 ! Set material 1 as a user-defined
! material with two temperatures
! and four data points at each
! temperature point.
TBTEMP,1.0 ! First temperature.
TBDATA,1,19e5,0.3,1e3,100, ! Four material constants for
! first temperature.
TBTEMP,2.0 ! Second temperature.
TBDATA,1,21e5,0.3,2e3,100, ! Four material constants for
! second temperature.

3.24.1. Using State Variables with UserMat

The UserMat subroutine supports state variables. To use them, initialize the constant table (TB,STATE),
then define the constants (TBDATA).

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 109
Chapter 3: Material Models

Example 3.5 Initializing the Values of State Variables for a User-Defined Material
TB,STATE,1,,4, ! Define material 1, which
! has four state variables.
TBDATA,1,C1,C2,C3,C4, ! Initialize the four state variables.

You can define a maximum of 1000 state variables (NPTS = 1000).

3.25. Material Strength Limits

Material strength limits represent maximum stresses or strains that a material can sustain. This data
table defines the strength limits and other related constants required for computing failure criteria (FC)
index of a material under various loading conditions. Specify a TBOPT value on the TB,FCLI command
to correspond to the stress limits (TBOPT = 1) or strain limits (TBOPT = 2). The following table lists the
coefficient values that are addressed for the available TBOPT values:

Strength TBOPT = 1 TBOPT = 2

Limit Stress Limits (NPTS = 16) Strain Limits (NPTS = 9)
Con-
stants
C1 XTEN -- Allowable tensile stress in XTEN -- Allowable tensile strain in
material X-direction (must be material X-direction (must be posit-
positive) ive)
C2 XCMP -- Allowable compressive XCMP -- Allowable compressive
stress in material X-direction (de- strain in material X-direction (default
fault to the negative of XTEN) to the negative of XTEN)
C3 YTEN -- Allowable tensile stress in YTEN -- Allowable tensile strain in
material Y-direction (must be material Y-direction (must be posit-
positive) ive)
C4 YCMP -- Allowable compressive YCMP -- Allowable compressive
stress in material Y-direction (de- strain in material Y-direction (default
fault to the negative of YTEN) to the negative of YTEN)
C5 ZTEN -- Allowable tensile stress in ZTEN -- Allowable tensile strain in
material Z-direction (must be material Z-direction (must be posit-
positive) ive)
C6 ZCMP -- Allowable compressive ZCMP -- Allowable compressive
stress in material Z-direction (de- strain in material Z-direction (default
fault to the negative of ZTEN) to the negative of ZTEN)
C7 XY -- Allowable XY shear stress XY -- Allowable XY shear strain (must
(must be positive) be positive)
C8 YZ -- Allowable YZ shear stress YZ -- Allowable YZ shear strain (must
(must be positive) be positive)
C9 XZ -- Allowable XZ shear stress XZ -- Allowable XZ shear strain (must
(must be positive) be positive)
C10 XYCP -- XY coupling coefficient for --
Tsai-Wu strength index (default =
-1.0)
C11 YZCP -- YZ coupling coefficient for --
Tsai-Wu failure index (default = -
1.0)

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
110 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Material Strength Limits

Strength TBOPT = 1 TBOPT = 2

Limit Stress Limits (NPTS = 16) Strain Limits (NPTS = 9)
Con-
stants
C12 XZCP -- XZ coupling coefficient --
for Tsai-Wu failure index (default
= -1.0)
C13 XZIT -- XZ tensile inclination para- --
meter for Puck failure index (de-
fault = 0.0)
C14 XZIC -- XZ compressive inclination --
parameter for Puck failure index
(default = 0.0)
C15 YZIT -- YZ tensile inclination para- --
meter for Puck failure index (de-
fault = 0.0)
C16 YZIC -- YZ compressive inclination --
parameter for Puck failure index
(default = 0.0)
C17 G1G2 -- Fracture toughness ratio --
between GI (mode I) and GII
(mode II)
C18 ETAL -- Longitudinal friction coef- --
ficient
C19 ETAT -- Transverse friction coeffi- --
cient
C20 ALP0 -- Fracture angle under pure --
transverse compression

To determine physical failure criteria in unidirectional fiber-reinforced composite materials, including

Puck and Hashin, LaRc03, and LaRc04 criteria, always define the reinforced fiber direction as the mater-
ial X direction.

The following table summarizes the applicable strength-limit constants for each failure criterion:

Strength Max Max

Tsai-Wu Hashin
Limit Strain Stress Puck Cri- LaRc03/04 User-
Strength Cri-
Con- Cri- Cri- terion Criterion Defined
Ratio terion
stants terion terion
C1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
C2 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
C3 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
C4 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
C5 Y Y Y -- -- -- Y
C6 Y Y Y -- Y -- Y
C7 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
C8 Y Y Y -- -- -- Y

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 111
Chapter 3: Material Models

Strength Max Max

Tsai-Wu Hashin
Limit Strain Stress Puck Cri- LaRc03/04 User-
Strength Cri-
Con- Cri- Cri- terion Criterion Defined
Ratio terion
stants terion terion
C9 Y Y Y -- -- -- Y
C10 -- -- Y -- -- -- Y
C11 -- -- Y -- -- -- Y
C12 -- -- Y -- -- -- Y
C13 -- -- -- Y -- -- Y
C14 -- -- -- Y -- -- Y
C15 -- -- -- Y -- -- Y
C16 -- -- -- Y -- -- Y
C17 -- -- -- -- -- Y Y
C18 -- -- -- -- -- Y Y
C19 -- -- -- -- -- Y Y
C20 -- -- -- -- -- Y Y

3.26. Damage Initiation Criteria

This data table defines the criteria type for determining the onset of the material damage under loading.

Specify the TBOPT value on the TB,DMGI command to correspond to failure criteria (TBOPT = 1 or
FCRT).

The following table shows the coefficient values addressed for the available TBOPT values:

Con- TBOPT = 1 (or FCRT)

stants NPTS = 4
C1 Failure criteria type [1] for
the tensile fiber failure mode
C2 Failure criteria type [1] for
the compressive fiber failure
mode
C3 Failure criteria type [1] for
the tensile matrix failure
mode
C4 Failure criteria type [1] for
the compressive matrix fail-
ure mode

1. The available failure criteria are as follows:

1 -- Maximum strain
2 -- Maximum stress
3 -- Puck
4 -- Hashin
5 -- LaRc03

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
112 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Damage Evolution Law

6 -- LaRc04
11 -- User-defined #1
...
19 -- User-defined #9

To complete the material damage definition, it is also necessary to specify a compatible material damage
evolution law (TB,DMGE). Without a damage evolution law, the damage-initiation criteria have no effect
on the material. The following table summarizes the compatible damage evolution laws with specific
damage-initiation criteria:

Compatible TB,DMGE,,,,TBOPT
Option
1 or MPDG
TB,DGMI,TBOPT 1 or Y
option FCRT

3.27. Damage Evolution Law

This data table defines the material damage evolution law (or the way a material degrades) following
the initiation of damage (TB,DMGE).

Specify the TBOPT value on the TB,DMGE command to correspond to the instant stiffness reduction
(TBOPT = 1 or MPDG).

The following table shows the coefficient values addressed for the available TBOPT values:

TBOPT = 1 or
Con- MPDG
stants
NPTS = 4
C1 Tensile fiber stiff-
ness reduction
[1]
C2 Compressive
fiber stiffness re-
duction [1]
C3 Tensile matrix
stiffness reduc-
tion [1]
C4 Compressive
matrix stiffness
reduction [1]

1. 0 -- no damage, 1 -- complete damage

To complete the material damage definition, it is also necessary to specify a compatible material damage
initiation criterion (TB,DMGI). Without a damage initiation criterion, the damage evolution law has no
effect on the material. The following table summarizes the compatible damage-initiation criteria with
specific damage evolution laws:

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 113
Chapter 3: Material Models

Compatible TB,DMGI,,,,TBOPT Option

1 or FCRT
TB,DGME,TB- 1 or MPDG Y
OPT option

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
114 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 4: Explicit Dynamics Materials
Material properties used in explicit dynamic analyses (ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide program) differ
somewhat from those used in implicit analyses (described in Linear Material Properties (p. 14) and Ma-
terial Models (p. 13).)

Most explicit dynamics material models require data table input. A data table is a series of constants
that are interpreted when they are used. Data tables are always associated with a material number and
are most often used to define nonlinear material data (that is, stress-strain curves). The form of the data
table (referred to as the TB table) depends on the material model being defined.

For a complete description of all explicit dynamics material models, including detailed data table input,
see Material Models in the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide.

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 115
 Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
116 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 5: Material Curve Fitting
Material curve fitting allows you to derive coefficients from experimental data that you provide for your
material. Curve fitting involves comparing your experimental data to certain preexisting nonlinear ma-
terial models. With this capability, you compare experimental data versus program-calculated data for
different nonlinear models; based on those comparisons, you can determine the best material model
to use during solution.

Curve fitting is based on the data table configurations outlined in the TB command. The data manipu-
lations and constructions are performed via the TBFT command.

The following material curve-fitting topics are available:

5.1. Hyperelastic Material Curve Fitting
5.2. Viscoelastic Material Curve Fitting
5.3. Creep Material Curve Fitting
5.4. Chaboche Material Curve Fitting

5.1. Hyperelastic Material Curve Fitting

Hyperelastic curve fitting is a tool for estimating your material constants by inputting your experimental
data and comparing it to the hyperelastic material models. Your stress-strain curves can be converted
to any of the supported hyperelastic models, including Mooney-Rivlin, Ogden, Neo-Hookean, Polynomial,
Arruda-Boyce, Gent, and Yeoh. Compressible hyperelastic Ogden hyper-foam and Blatz-Ko models are
also supported.

You perform curve fitting either interactively (GUI) or via batch commands. You input your experimental
data, choose a model from one of nine supplied hyperelastic models, perform a regression analysis,
graphically view the curve-fitting results, compare the fits to the experimental data, and write the fitted
coefficients to the database as nonlinear data table commands for the subsequent finite element analyses.

Hyperelastic models can define three types of behavior: purely incompressible, nearly incompressible,
and compressible. Hyperelastic curve fitting is based on the HYPER option of the TB command.

5.1.1. Understanding the Hyperelastic Material Curve-Fitting Process

The steps for hyperelastic curve fitting are defined as follows:

1 Step 1. Prepare Experimental Data The experimental data must be a plain text file delimited by
a space or a comma.
2 Step 2. Input the Experimental Data The experimental data can be read in by browsing to the file
location (GUI) or by specifying the filename and path (batch)
on the command line.
3 Step 3. Select a Material Model Op- The material options for the applicable curve-fitting regimen
tion are defined in the TB command. Nine hyperelastic models
are supported. After you pick a model, you can still change
to another model if an ideal fit is not realized.

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 117
Chapter 5: Material Curve Fitting

4 Step 4. Initialize the Coefficients Depending on the model, hyperelastic curve fitting can be a
linear or nonlinear regression process.The hyperelastic ma-
terial models, along with the associated process for each are
listed in Table 5.3: Hyperelastic Curve-Fitting Model Types.
5 Step 5. Specify Control Parameters You will specify the type of error norm to be used to generate
and Solve the curve fit.
6 Step 6. Plot Your Experimental Data You review and verify the results by comparing the experi-
and Analyze mental data and the regression errors. If the results you obtain
are not acceptable, repeat steps 3 to 5 to perform a new curve-
fitting solution.
7 Step 7.Write Data to the TB Com- Write your curve-fitting results to the database in the TB
mand command table format.

5.1.2. Step 1. Prepare Experimental Data

Curve fitting requires experimental test data. Your hyperelastic curve-fitting data needs to be a comma
or space delimited file, referencing your stress vs. strain values.

Hyperelastic curve fitting supports three main behaviors:

• Case 1 - Totally Incompressible Models (see Table 5.1: Experimental Details for Case 1 and 2 Models and
Blatz-Ko (p. 118))
• Case 2 - Nearly Incompressible Models (see Table 5.1: Experimental Details for Case 1 and 2 Models and
Blatz-Ko (p. 118))
• Case 3 - Compressible Models (see Table 5.2: Experimental Details for Case 3 Models (p. 118))

The types of data required for each of these cases is defined in the tables below.

Table 5.1 Experimental Details for Case 1 and 2 Models and Blatz-Ko
Experimental Type Column 1 Column 2 Column 3
Uniaxial Test Engineering Strain Engineering Stress
Biaxial Test Engineering Strain Engineering Stress
Planar/Shear Test Engineering Strain Engineering Stress
(in loading direc-
tion)
Simple Shear Test Engineering Shear Engineering Shear (Optional) Engineering Nor-
Strain Stress mal Stress (normal to the
edge of shear stress)
Volumetric Test Volume Ratio (J) Hydrostatic Pressure

Table 5.2 Experimental Details for Case 3 Models

Experiment Type Column 1 Column 2 Column 3
Uniaxial Test Engineering Strain Lateral Direction Engineering Engineering
Strain Stress
Biaxial Test Engineering Strain Engineering Strain (in thick- Engineering
ness direction) Stress

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
118 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Hyperelastic Material Curve Fitting

Experiment Type Column 1 Column 2 Column 3

Shear Test Engineering Strain (in Engineering Strain (in thick- Engineering
loading direction) ness direciton) Stress
Simple Shear Test Engineering Shear Strain Engineering Shear Stress (Optional) Engin-
eering Normal
Stress (normal
to the edge of
shear stress)
Volumetric Test Volume Ratio (J) Hydrostatic Pressure

J is the ratio of current volume to the original volume.

All stresses output in POST1/POST26 are true stresses and logarithmic strains.

5.1.3. Step 2. Input the Experimental Data

Use the EADD option of the TBFT command to input your data files. First, designate whether they are
uniaxial, biaxial, shear, simple shear, or volumetric, and then designate the location in the Option2,
Option3, and Option4 fields. All of the stress values will be engineering stress, except for the volu-
metric option (true stress). The file should be a simple, delimited set of stress and strain values similar
to the following:
0.9703 60.00
0.9412 118.2
0.9127 175.2
0.8847 231.1

For temperature-dependent curve fitting, specify your temperature values at the top of the experimental
data using the
/temp,value

line. This header format specifies the attribute (temp) and its value (100). An example of a typical data
input using these attributes follows:
/temp,100
0.9703 60.00
0.9412 118.2
0.9127 175.2
0.8847 231.1

Adding this header introduces a temperature attribute of 100 degrees. You can add additional data
sets at other temperatures, in additional files. One file can have data at only one temperature.

For compressible materials, the curve-fitting tool's default behavior is to solve only for stress as a function
of strain and lateral strain. To force the curve-fitting tool to also fit experimental lateral strain data to
generate the coefficients for the Ogden compressible foam model, add the line /USEL,1 near the top
of the experimental data file. This option is valid for uniaxial, biaxial and shear test data.

5.1.3.1. Batch
TBFT,EADD,ID,Option1,Option2,Option3,Option4

where:

ID = Index corresponding to the material number

Option1 = UNIA, BIAX, SHEA, SSHE or VOLU

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 119
Chapter 5: Material Curve Fitting

Option2 = name of file containing experimental data

Option3 = file name extension
Option4 = file directory

5.1.3.2. GUI
The Material Properties GUI provides an input field where you can type in the filename of your data
file, and also include the appropriate path. You can also browse to a file in a specified location. Separate
input is performed for each Option1 value (UNIA, BIAX, SHEA, etc.).

5.1.4. Step 3. Select a Material Model Option

Use the FADD option of the TBFT command to define your constitutive model. Table 5.3: Hyperelastic
Curve-Fitting Model Types (p. 120) below lists the models that are available for hyperelastic curve fitting.
When volumetric data is supplied, a compressible or nearly incompressible model is implied, and only
the designated options will be available. When no volumetric data is supplied, the model is understood
to be incompressible, and those model options will be available. Supplying zero coefficients for the
volumetric data field will also denote an incompressible model.

Table 5.3 Hyperelastic Curve-Fitting Model Types

Model Name Abbreviation Order/Options No. of Coeffi- Linear/Nonlinear
cients [1] Fitting
Mooney-Rivlin moon 2, 3, 5, 9 2/3/5/9+1 Linear
Polynomial poly 1 to N see below [2] Linear
Yeoh yeoh 1 to N N+N Linear
Neo-Hookean neoh - 1+1 Linear
Ogden ogde 1 to N 2*N+N Nonlinear
Arruda-Boyce boyc - 2+1 Nonlinear
Gent gent - 2+1 Nonlinear
Blatz-Ko blat - 1 Nonlinear
Ogden Hyper- foam 1 to N 2*N+N Nonlinear
foam

1. The number of coefficients is usually the sum of the number of deviatoric coefficients and the number
of volumetric coefficients.
2. The number of coefficients for a polynomial will be dependent on the polynomial order N.

Number of Coefficients =∑ + +
=1

Blatz-Ko and Ogden hyper-foam are compressible models. For Ogden hyper-foam, the experimental
data you supply will require additional fields.

For more information about the hyperelastic models available for curve fitting, see Hyperelastic Mater-
ial Models in the Material Reference.

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
120 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Hyperelastic Material Curve Fitting

5.1.4.1. Batch Method

TBFT,FADD,ID,HYPER,Option2,Option3

where:

ID = Index corresponding to the material number

Option2 = model name, as specified in Table 5.3: Hyperelastic Curve-Fitting Model Types (p. 120)
(above)
Option3 = order or number of coefficients, where applicable. Table 5.3: Hyperelastic Curve-Fitting
Model Types (p. 120) (above) specifies the number and type of coefficient(s) necessary for each hyper-
elastic model type.

5.1.4.2. GUI Method

A pull-down selection menu in the material GUI allows you to pick the applicable material model option.
The options displayed will be dependent on the format of your experimental data file.

5.1.5. Step 4. Initialize the Coefficients

Depending on the model you choose, hyperelastic curve fitting can be a linear or a nonlinear regression
process. In both cases, the initial coefficients you supply will determine how accurate and efficient your
curve fit will be. The initial values of the coefficients generally come from experience, and also from
studying the function that defines the model you are attempting to compare/fit your data to. For most
hyperelastic models, 1 or -1 is a good starting point. However, coefficient values can vary greatly de-
pending on the model chosen. The Gent model, for instance, provides good fit with initial coefficient
values as high as 1000.

You can also fix (hold constant) your coefficients (Option4 = FIX on the TBFT command). You specify
a value for a coefficient and keep it unchanged, while allowing the other coefficients to be operated
on. You can then release the coefficient you fixed and operate on it after the others are optimized. By
default, all of the coefficients are free to vary. The capability to fix coefficients applies only to nonlinear
curve fits (as listed in Table 5.3: Hyperelastic Curve-Fitting Model Types (p. 120)).

For temperature-dependent experimental data, enable temperature-dependency and specify a reference

temperature before solving for the coefficients. You can set the reference temperature only to values
specified using the /temp,value header line in the experimental data.

You can also specify tref = all and initiate multiple solves to evaluate coefficients at all available discrete
temperature values. In this case, for data at three temperatures (t1, t2, and t3), a single TBFT,SOLVE
entry will initiate three different solve operations at those three discrete temperatures.

With temperature dependency on and the reference temperature set to a particular value, a TBFT,SOLVE
command solves for coefficients only at that temperature. To solve for coefficients at other temperatures,
you set the reference temperature to each desired discrete temperature value and solve again.

You can initialize the coefficients before or after turning temperature dependency on. If the coefficients
are initialized before turning temperature dependency on, the specified coefficients will become the
initial coefficients for all future solves for that particular model. These coefficients are, however, overridden
when temperature dependency is turned on and another set of initial values are specified at discrete
temperature values. The curve-fitting tool looks for the initial coefficients at a particular temperature.
If no coefficients are specified at a discrete temperature, the initial coefficients set before temperature
dependency was turned on are used.

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 121
Chapter 5: Material Curve Fitting

5.1.5.1. Batch
TBFT,SET,ID,HYPER,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5

where:

ID = Index corresponding to the material number

Option2 = model name (see Table 5.3: Hyperelastic Curve-Fitting Model Types (p. 120) (above) for the
available models)
Option3 = order, if applicable
Option4 = index of coefficient
Option5 = value of the coefficient

To set Option4 for a reference temperature, or for temperature dependency:

TBFT,SET,ID,HYPER,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5

where:

ID = Index corresponding to the material number

Option2 = model name. See Table 5.3: Hyperelastic Curve-Fitting Model Types (p. 120) (above) for the
available models.
Option3 = order, if applicable
Option4 = tdep or tref
Option5 = If Option4 = tdep, Option5 = 1 turns on temperature dependency, and Option5
= 0 turns it off. If Option4 = tref, Option5 will be either “all,” or the reference temperature.
TBFT,FIX,ID,HYPER,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5

where:

ID = Index corresponding to the material number

Option2 = model name See Table 5.3: Hyperelastic Curve-Fitting Model Types (p. 120) (above) for the
available models.
Option3 = (Blank--not applicable)
Option4 = index of coefficient
Option5 = 1 for fixed and 0 to vary

5.1.5.2. GUI
The GUI automatically updates your coefficient tables depending on the model you pick. You can
modify individual coefficients to initialize them at values you believe are more appropriate.

5.1.6. Step 5. Specify Control Parameters and Solve

Depending on the model, your hyperelastic curve fitting will be either a linear or nonlinear regression
process (see Table 5.3: Hyperelastic Curve-Fitting Model Types (p. 120) (above) for details). Your error norms
can be either normalized or non-normalized. Normalized error norms (the default regression option)
generally give better results than the non-normalized error norms, since normalized error gives equal
weight to all of your data points.

The solution control parameters of a nonlinear regression include:

1. Number of iterations
2. Residual tolerance

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
122 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Hyperelastic Material Curve Fitting

3. Coefficient change tolerance

The solution stops when both the residual tolerance and the coefficient change tolerance of your error
norm are met, or if the number of iterations criteria is met. When you use nonlinear regression, you
must initialize your coefficients.

5.1.6.1. Batch
TBFT,SOLVE,ID,HYPER,Option2,Option3,Option4, ..., Option7

where:

ID = Index corresponding to the material number

Option2 = model name. See Table 5.3: Hyperelastic Curve-Fitting Model Types (p. 120) (above) for the
models available.
Option3 = order or number of your coefficients. See Table 5.3: Hyperelastic Curve-Fitting Model
Types (p. 120) (above) for possible values.
Option4 = curve-fitting procedure: 0 = non-normalized least squares, 1 = normalized least squares
Option5 = maximum number of iterations
Option6 = tolerance of residual changes
Option7 = tolerance of coefficient changes

Other solution parameters are available. See the TBFT command for details.

5.1.6.2. GUI
The GUI lets you specify all of your control parameters (error norm, solution control parameters, and
the solver options) interactively. You select the appropriate options from the provided menus, and solve
to generate the coefficients. You can change the parameters and repeat the solution as necessary to
ensure an accurate result. The unused options are disabled whenever necessary.

5.1.7. Step 6. Plot Your Experimental Data and Analyze

After you initiate Solve, the coefficient tables will contain the fitted coefficients and also the residual
errors. You can then plot your data and visually interpret the results. The first column is always your X-
axis, with each additional column plotted separately as a function of column one.

You should try to reserve column one for the variable that you would like to see vary in the plot. For
example, if your data contains time, temperature, stress, and creep strain, and you wish to see the creep
strain vary as a function of time at different temperatures and stresses in the plot, you add your exper-
imental data using multiple TBFT,EADD commands (or the corresponding GUI operations) by splitting
the file into multiple experimental files as prescribed earlier, one for each combination of temperature
and stress.

5.1.7.1. GUI
Use the GRAPH button to plot the data. Your plots will show columns 2 and above as separate curves,
plotted as a function of column 1. The data in column 1 is always the X-axis. By default, all the experi-
ments are plotted in the GUI window. To view specific data and its corresponding fitting result, you
can click the right mouse button (RMB) on the specific data set, and pick a desired option to view the
results. Other RMB plotting utilities can be found for different data fields in the curve-fitting GUI window.

Use RMB functions to Zoom, Fit, Save Plot to File, View/Hide Legend and View/Hide Grid. Two or more
fitted functions can also be compared in the same plot. For example, you can view Mooney2 Uniaxial

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 123
Chapter 5: Material Curve Fitting

and Mooney9 Uniaxial plots directly on top of each other, provided you have already solved for both
of these functions. RMB also allows you to set the number of points used to generate the plot, and also
change the minimum X value and the maximum X value in a plot. You can also hide a particular curve
within a graph, turn the legend and/or axis displays on and off, and switch the scales between log scale
and regular scale. Use the middle-mouse button to eliminate a specific curve and clarify or refine the
remaining curve.

5.1.7.2. Review/Verify
The two factors you consider in determining results acceptability are visual fit and the error norm/residual
values. When you plot the curve, the error norm/residual values are printed in the curve-fitting GUI
window. Error norm values help you determine the quality of curve fitting and whether to accept the
results, but are not always the best indicator of a valid curve fit. Plotting the curves and visually assessing
the result is usually the best indication. If the results are unacceptable, you may want to go back to
step 3 and solve again, either by picking a different model, increasing the order, or redefining your
initial values of the coefficients or other control parameters. You can continue to use your original ex-
perimental data, repeating step 3 through step 7 until you get an acceptable solution.

5.1.8. Step 7. Write Data to the TB Command

After you are satisfied with your curve-fitting results, you can write the curve-fitting data to the database
using TBFT,FSET. Both the GUI and the command line convert the coefficients to the appropriate form
before writing to TB tables. The program stores the data as part of the material property set for use in
subsequent analyses.

5.1.8.1. Batch
TBFT,FSET,ID,HYPER,Option2,Option3

where:

ID = Index corresponding to the material number

Option2 = model name. See Table 5.3: Hyperelastic Curve-Fitting Model Types (p. 120) (above) for the
models available.
Option3 = order or number of your coefficients. See Table 5.3: Hyperelastic Curve-Fitting Model
Types (p. 120) (above) for possible values.

5.1.8.2. GUI
Once you complete the process and update your material data properties with the representative curve
data, you are returned to the material properties dialog. The curve data can now be accessed for the
full range of material behavior.

5.2. Viscoelastic Material Curve Fitting

Viscoelastic material curve fitting determines your material constants by relating your experimental
data to the Prony series expansion for both the shear and bulk modulus of the hypoviscoelastic mater-
ial option.

Curve fitting is performed either interactively or via batch commands. You input the experimental data,
define the order of Prony series expansion, perform nonlinear regression, view the curve-fitting results
graphically, compare the experimental data, and write the fitted coefficients to the database as nonlinear
data table commands for the subsequent finite elements analyses. You can fit shear modulus and/or

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
124 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Viscoelastic Material Curve Fitting

bulk modulus and/or shift functions, along with discrete temperature dependencies for multiple data
sets.

5.2.1. Understanding the Viscoelastic Material Curve-Fitting Process

The steps for viscoelastic curve fitting are defined as follows:

1 Step 1. Prepare Experimental Data The experimental data must be a plain text file delimited by
a space or a comma.
2 Step 2. Input the Data The experimental data can be read in from the GUI or via batch
commands, as a plain text file.
3 Step 3. Select a Material Model Op- This includes Prony series expansion of shear and/or bulk
tion moduli as well as shift function.The supported shift functions
include WLF and TN.
4 Step 4. Initialize the Coefficients Viscoelastic curve fitting is a nonlinear regression; the initial
value of your coefficients is very important for a successful
solution.
5 Step 5. Specify Control Parameters Specify the error norm to be used, the solution control para-
and Solve meters, and perform the nonlinear regression.
6 Step 6. Plot the Experimental Data Graphically view the curve-fitting results. Review and verify
and Analyze the results by comparing them with the experimental data
and the regression errors. If any factor is not acceptable, repeat
steps 3 to 7 to obtain a new curve-fitting solution.
7 Step 7.Write Data to the TB Com- Write your curve-fitting results in TB command format to the
mand database.

5.2.2. Step 1. Prepare Experimental Data

Curve fitting requires experimental test data. To use curve fitting with viscoelastic materials, the exper-
imental data must be shear modulus and/or bulk modulus as a function of time and temperature. The
experimental data is named sdec or bdec to distinguish it from other data types, such as hyperelastic
or creep. This also makes documenting your analyses more convenient.

Your viscoelastic test data must be a plain text file with headers to define the test data. The data file
should be in table form, delimited by a space or a comma. The header defines the test data type and
the temperature for your test data. For viscoelastic curve fitting with multiple temperatures, you can
evaluate coefficients at each discrete temperature point and write it as a temperature-dependent Prony
data table, or you can use the Williams-Landau-Ferry (WLF) or Tool-Narayanaswamy (TN) shift functions
to account for the temperature dependency. (See Shift Functions in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference.)
A separate data file must be provided for each discrete temperature. The viscoelastic test data can be
any of 4 data types, see Table 5.4: Viscoelastic Data Types and Abbreviations (p. 125).

Table 5.4 Viscoelastic Data Types and Abbreviations

Time time
Shear modulus smod
Bulk modulus bmod
Temperature temp

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 125
Chapter 5: Material Curve Fitting

The headers are used to describe the data types that characterize the test data columns or attributes
of the data.

The following listing contains the appropriate headers, followed by the delimited data:
/temp,100 ! define temperature attribute
0.01 2992.53
1 2978.514207
2 2965.45541
4 2942.293214
6 2922.530649
8 2905.612202
10 2891.073456
20 2842.506984
40 2798.142793
60 2772.383729
80 2750.631843
100 2730.398114
200 2643.125432
400 2517.475394
600 2431.262053
800 2366.580897
1000 2313.955396
2000 2117.922594
4000 1833.734397
6000 1627.199197
8000 1470.6806
10000 1347.264527
20000 964.0141125
40000 586.1405449
60000 392.186777
80000 277.2706253
100000 202.0025278
200000 46.87056342
400000 2.669209118
600000 0.156653269
800000 0.0137224
1000000 0.005591539

5.2.3. Step 2. Input the Data

You use the EADD option of the TBFT command to input your data files. The experimental data must
be read in from a plain text file. The experimental data must be prepared as discussed in the previous
section, and include both the header information and the formatted test data. Each file is viewed as a
data set, and can be the complete set of experimental test data or a part of an experimental test data.

You can include several data sets, including tests performed at different temperatures. Although different
data sets can have the same/or different temperature, each file can have only one temperature. Multiple
temperature data sets must be input with multiple files.

Two types of data may be required for viscoelastic curve fitting, either shear modulus vs. time and/or
bulk modulus vs. time. The data can also be a function of temperature, which can then be accounted
for by either WLF or TN shift function. You can use the GUI or batch command to input your experimental
data.

5.2.3.1. Batch
TBFT,EADD,ID,Option1,Option2,Option3,Option4

where:

ID = index corresponding to the material number

Option1 = experimental data type, either sdec or bdec

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
126 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Viscoelastic Material Curve Fitting

Option2 = name of file containing experimental data

Option3 = file name extension
Option4 = file directory

The sdec coefficient refers to the shear modulus as a function of time. The bdec coefficient refers to
the bulk modulus as a function of time.

5.2.3.2. GUI
Click on the Add Dataset button and type the filename into the area provided. You can also browse
to a file in a specified location. Separate input is performed for each data type (Option1 = sdec, or
bdec)

5.2.4. Step 3. Select a Material Model Option

The TBFT command provides the curve-fitting tools for viscoelastic material modeling. You represent
your viscoelastic material behavior by a set of Prony-series expansions of shear and/or bulk moduli to
characterize the shear and the bulk deformation of the material. You can also use the shift functions
to characterize the material's temperature dependency.

First you define a case name to associate the set of coefficients for the Prony expansions with the shift
functions that characterize the material behavior. You can use the case name to define several different
options that characterize the same test data, and then to compare the curve-fitting results. To define
the material model, you must first define a case name, and then specify the order of shear and bulk
moduli and the type of the shift function(s), if required. You need to create an additional case to define
different shear order, bulk order or shift options. Once you create a case, the number of shear terms,
bulk terms, or shift options cannot be changed.

5.2.4.1. Batch Method

You define a viscoelastic material with the Prony series expansion by creating a case and setting the
order of shear modulus, bulk modulus, and shift options. You create the case with the TBFT,FCASE
command. The first line will include FCASE, ID, NEW. Then you specify the number of shear terms, bulk
terms, and the shift function. The case is actually created only after the option is issued. The following
syntax examples and argument descriptions illustrate the relationship of these activities.
TBFT,FCASE,ID,NEW,Option2,Option3

where:

ID = Index corresponding to the material number

Option2 = PVHE (refers to Prony Viscohypoelastic)
Option3 = Case name
TBFT,FADD,ID,CATEGORY,Option2,Option3

where:

ID = Index corresponding to the material number

CATEGORY = VISCO
Option2 = pshear or pbulk or shift
Option3 = dependent on Option2 as follows:

• Option2 = pshear or bulk, Option3 = NONE, or 1 to N

• Option2 = shift, Option3 = NONE or TN or WLF

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 127
Chapter 5: Material Curve Fitting

TBFT,FCASE,ID,FINI

5.2.4.2. GUI Method

You can use the GUI to interactively navigate the tree structure of the curve-fitting window. Each of
the shear, bulk and shift options can be selected, and you can fill in the appropriate case name in a
text box field. As you choose the options, the coefficient table is automatically created.

5.2.5. Step 4. Initialize the Coefficients

The initial values chosen for your coefficients determines the success of your viscoelastic curve-fitting
operations. A complete model has (2*NG+1) + (2* Nk +1) + NS number of the coefficients, where

• NG is the order of the Prony series expansion of the shear modulus,

• Nk is the order of the Prony series expansion of the bulk modulus, and
• NS is the number of coefficients of the shift function. (NS = 2 for the TN option, and NS = 3 for the WLF
option.)

The coefficients are ordered as shear terms first, then the bulk terms, and then the shift function. The
coefficients are ordered as A0G, A1G, τ1G, A2G, τ2G, … AnG, and τnG for shear modulus, and A0K, A1K, τ1K,
A2K, τ2K, … AnK, and τnK for bulk modulus.

A shift function must be used together with your shear and/or bulk modulus for temperature-dependent
experimental data.

The default coefficient is set to 1, but it is good practice to redefine the initial values before solving.
When initializing your coefficients, set AnKs to 1 and τnKs to time values that are equally distributed in
the log scale, spanning the data range from minimum to maximum time.

For example, consider the shear-decay versus time-data file. If the time values vary from 1 to 10000,
and if you use third-order Prony, logical guesses for τ1G , τ2G and τ3G that span this range could be τ1G
= 1, τ2G = 100, and τ3G = 10,000 (also (1), (10) and (10,000) or (1), (1,000) and (10,000), respectively).

The equations below describe the relationship between the Prony Coefficient (αn) and the corresponding
coefficient generated in curve fitting (An). K and G are the shear modulus and bulk modulus at t = 0.
This was done to keep all αnG and αnK values used in the TB tables positive.

αnK = (AnK * AnK) / K

αnG = (AnG * AnG) / G

A good guess for the WLF or TN parameter is the reference temperature you used during your partial
solve for shear and bulk. The index of the reference/base temperatures is the sum of NumShear +
NumBulk + 1.

You can also fix (hold constant) your coefficients. You specify a value for a coefficient and keep it un-
changed, while allowing the other coefficients to be operated on. You can then release the fixed coef-
ficient later if desired. By default, all of the coefficients are free to vary.

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
128 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Viscoelastic Material Curve Fitting

You estimate coefficients for temperature-dependent data either by using the shift function or by setting
the temperature-dependency flag and setting a reference temperature before solving for the coefficients.
You can set the reference temperature only to values specified using the /temp,value header line in
the experimental data.

You can also specify tref = all and initiate multiple solves to evaluate coefficients at all available discrete
temperature values. In this case, for data at three temperatures (t1, t2, and t3), a single TBFT,SOLVE
command initiates three separate solve operations at those three discrete temperature values, and
generate data at three corresponding discrete temperatures.

With temperature dependency specified and the reference temperature set to a particular value, a
TBFT,SOLVE command solves for coefficients only at that discrete temperature. To solve for coefficients
at other temperatures, set the reference temperature to each of the desired discrete temperature values
and solve again.

You can initialize the coefficients before or after activating temperature dependency. If the coefficients
initialize before setting temperature dependency, the specified coefficients become the initial coefficients
for all future solves for that particular model. These coefficients are, however, overridden when temper-
ature dependency is active and another set of values is specified at a discrete temperature value. The
curve-fitting tool looks for the initial coefficients at a particular temperature. If no coefficients are specified
at discrete temperature values, the initial coefficients set before temperature dependency was activated
are used.

5.2.5.1. Batch Method

TBFT,SET,ID,CASE,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5

where:

ID = Index corresponding to the material number

Option2 = Case name
Option3 = (Blank--not applicable)
Option4 = Index of coefficient
Option5 = Value of coefficient

Example 5.1 Initializing Coefficients Using the Batch Method

TBFT,SET,1, myvisco1,,1,1.2 ! Initialize the first coefficient to 1.2
TBFT,SET,1, myvisco1,,2,1.5 ! Initialize the second coefficient to 1.5

Use the TBFT,FIX command to fix a coefficient to a value set by the TBFT, SET command or to release
a previously fixed coefficient. By default, coefficients are not fixed.
TBFT,FIX,ID,CASE,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5

where:

ID = Index corresponding to the material number

Option2 = Case name
Option3 = (Blank--not applicable)
Option4 = Index of coefficient
Option5 = 1 to fix, 0 to vary

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 129
Chapter 5: Material Curve Fitting

Example 5.2 Fixing Coefficient Values

TBFT,FIX,1, myvisco1,,1,1.! Fix the first coefficient to a value set via TBFT,SET
TBFT,FIX,1, myvisco1,,2,1 ! Fix the second coefficient to a value set via TBFT,SET

Temperature dependency uses Option4, and references data files you entered with the appropriate
temp header.
TBFT,SET,ID,VISCO,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5

where:

ID = Index corresponding to the material number

Option2 = Model name. See Table 5.4: Viscoelastic Data Types and Abbreviations (p. 125) (above) for
the models available.
Option3 = (Blank--not applicable)
Option4 = tdep or tref
Option5 = If Option 4 = tdep, then 1 turns temperature dependency on and 0 turns it off. If
Option 4 = tref, this value will be a specific temperature, or ALL.

5.2.5.2. GUI Method

The coefficients table is automatically updated in the viscoelastic curve-fitting GUI window when the
order of shear modulus and/or bulk modulus and/or shift function are defined. Specify values for your
coefficients in the coefficients table in the curve-fitting GUI window, and check the appropriate boxes
to fix them or allow them to vary.

5.2.6. Step 5. Specify Control Parameters and Solve

Viscoelastic curve fitting is a nonlinear regression process. You can use either normalized or non-nor-
malized error norm for the regression. The normalized error norm is the default regression option for
calculating the error. This error norm generally gives better results than the non-normalized error norm,
since the normalized error gives equal weight to all data points.

The solution control parameters for nonlinear regression include number of iterations, residual tolerance,
and coefficient change tolerance. The solution stops when both residual tolerance of error norm and
coefficient change tolerance is met or if the number of iterations criteria is met. The coefficients are
updated when the solution is completed. In general it is very difficult to directly solve a complete case
including coefficients of the shear modulus, the bulk modulus and the shift function. Three solver options
including shear modulus only, bulk modulus, and shift function (or all) are provided to allow you to
solve only Prony coefficients of the shear modulus, Prony coefficients of the bulk modulus, and coeffi-
cients of the shift function. In many cases, however, the coefficients of shift function can't be solved
until the shear or bulk modulus are solved. It is normal for a solution to not converge at first, but to
stop when the maximum iterations criteria is reached. At that point, you should examine the curve-fitting
results and the solution history before proceeding any further. You can then adjust parameters and
resolve the problem whenever it is necessary.

5.2.6.1. Temperature-Dependent Solutions Using the Shift Function

For viscoelastic curve fitting using the shift function, follow these three steps to perform the regression:

1. Solve the shear coefficients (if there are any):

Set the partial solve option using TBFT, SET,,,,,COMP, PSHEAR.

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
130 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Viscoelastic Material Curve Fitting

Set the reference temperature at which your partial solution will be performed using TBFT,
SET,,,,,TREF, TX. Only data at temperature TX will be used to estimate shear coefficients

Solve
2. Solve the bulk coefficients (if there are any):

Set the partial solve option using TBFT, SET,,,,,COMP, PBULK.

Set the reference temperature at which your partial solution will be performed using TBFT,
SET,,,,,TREF, TX. The reference temperature should be the same for both shear and bulk. Only
data at temperature TX will be used to estimate shear coefficients

TBFT,SOLVE
3. Solve the shift function (or all) coefficients:

Set the partial solve option using TBFT, SET,,,,,COMP, PVHE.

TREF is not used when solving for all parameters. All temperature data is used to estimate
the coefficients.

TBFT,SOLVE

For GUI operations, when only the shear and bulk buttons are checked, only your shear coefficients are
solved. To solve for both shear and bulk, you must check all three buttons.

5.2.6.2. Temperature-Dependent Solutions Without the Shift Function

If you do not use the shift function, discrete data must be supplied to account for temperature depend-
ency. Follow these steps to perform the regression:

1. Set the temperature-dependency flag using the command TBFT, SET,,,,,TDEP,1.

2. Solve the shear coefficients (if there are any):

Set the partial solve option using TBFT, SET,,,,,COMP, PSHEAR.

Set the reference temperature at which your partial solution will be performed using TBFT,
SET,,,,,TREF, TX. Only data at temperature TX will be used to estimate shear coefficients

Initialize the coefficients.

TBFT,SOLVE

Repeat the above steps for all temperatures.

3. Solve the bulk coefficients (if there are any):

Set the partial solve option using TBFT, SET,,,,,COMP, PBULK.

Set the reference temperature at which your partial solution will be performed using TBFT,
SET,,,,,TREF, TX. Only data at temperature TX will be used to estimate the shear coefficients.

Initialize the coefficients.

TBFT,SOLVE

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 131
Chapter 5: Material Curve Fitting

Repeat the above steps for all temperatures.

Alternatively, you can solve for both shear and bulk data at the same time.

1. Set the temperature dependency flag using the command TBFT, SET,,,,,TDEP,1.
2. Solve for ALL coefficients.

Set the partial solve option using TBFT, SET,,,,,COMP, PVHE.

Set the reference temperature at which your partial solution will be performed using TBFT,
SET,,,,,TREF, TX. Only data at temperature TX will be used to estimate shear and bulk coefficients

Initialize the coefficients.

TBFT,SOLVE

Repeat the above steps for all of the desired temperatures.

5.2.6.3. Batch Method

Solution option command is:
TBFT,SET,ID,CASE,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5

where:

ID = Index corresponding to the material number

Option2 = Case name
Option3 = (Blank--not applicable)
Option4 = comp
Option5 = pshea (for Shear only) or pbulk (for bulk only)

The SOLVE option allows you to specify procedure types, tolerances, and number of iterations.
TBFT,SOLVE,ID,CASE,Option2,Option3,Option4, ..., Option7

where:

ID = Index corresponding to the material number

Option2 = visco function name (See Table 5.4: Viscoelastic Data Types and Abbreviations (p. 125).)
Option3 = (Blank--not applicable)
Option4 = Curve-fitting procedure: 0 = non-normalized least squares, 1 = normalized least squares
(default)
Option5 = Maximum number of iterations
Option6 = Tolerance of residual changes
Option7 = Tolerance of coefficient changes

Other solving parameters are available. See the TBFT command for details.

5.2.6.4. GUI Method

The GUI provides access for you to choose your error norm, solution control parameters, and solver
options. Once you complete these specifications and SOLVE, you can go back and modify your para-
meters as necessary to obtain a good curve fit.

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
132 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Viscoelastic Material Curve Fitting

5.2.7. Step 6. Plot the Experimental Data and Analyze

The best way to verify a good fit between your experimental data and the provided curves is to plot
your curves and visually inspect them. The Graph button provides direct means to plot the data.

5.2.7.1. Analyze Your Curves for Proper Fit

All of your data is plotted as a function of column 1 for the X-axis. Columns 2 and above are each
plotted in a separate graph, in a separate window, with the corresponding fitted data as a function of
column 1. By default, all the shear data sets and/or the bulk data sets as well as the corresponding fitting
results are plotted in two separated graphs in a GUI window. To view a specific data and its corresponding
fitting result, you click the right mouse button (RMB) on the specific data set, and pick a desired option.
You can also use the right mouse button to turn the legend and/or axis on and off. The scales can be
also switched between log scale and regular scale. With the middle button, you can eliminate certain
curves from each window's display in order to see the remaining data more clearly.

Right mouse button (RMB) functions allow you to Zoom, Fit, Save Plot to File, View/Hide Legend, and
View/Hide Grid. Two or more fitted functions can also be compared in the same plot. RMB also allows
you to see the number of points used to generate the plot, and also change the minimum X value and
the maximum X value in a plot. You can use the middle-mouse button (context sensitive) to hide a
particular curve within a graph.

Reviewing your curve-fitting result graphically is the only way to ensure a good fit. After plotting the
curve-fitting results, you can then review multiple plots and also verify the error norm/residual value
that is printed in the curve-fitting GUI window. This information helps you determine the quality of a
curve fit and decide whether to accept the results. If not, you may want to go back to step 3, solve
again by changing the order of the Prony series, redefining certain initial values of the coefficients, and
possibly other control parameters. You can continue to use your original data, repeating step 3 through
step 6 until you are satisfied with the solution.

5.2.8. Step 7. Write Data to the TB Command

After a successful curve fitting, the last step is to write the curve-fitting data as a Prony data table (the
TB,PRONY command) to the database. The GUI or the command line converts the coefficients to the
appropriate form before writing TB commands.

The curve-fitting tool calculates coefficients that differ from those shown in the TB,PRONY table. The
following equations are used to convert the calculated coefficients to the TB,PRONY format:

Curve-Fitting Equation:

− t / τi
= 2
0
+ ∑ 2
i
i =1−N

Prony Equation:

= = α + ∑ α
−  τ

αi and τi (i = 1 to N) are the Prony coefficients (entered via the TB,PRONY) command. A0 is not entered
in the Prony table.

Conversion Procedure:

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 133
Chapter 5: Material Curve Fitting

t =0 = ∑ 2
i
i = 0 −N

α =

=

5.2.8.1. Batch Method

TBFT,FSET,ID,Option2,Option3

where:

Option2 = Case
Option3 = Case name

5.2.8.2. GUI Method

Click the Write to Database button and the fitted coefficients are automatically written to the material
database according Prony data table. Please note that the coefficients you see in the curve-fitting
module are different from those in the TB tables. The τ values remain the same, but the α values are
different. The α values shown are the square of the α values derived during curve fitting. They are also
normalized to make α at time 0 = 1.

5.3. Creep Material Curve Fitting

Use curve fitting to determine your creep material behavior. Thirteen creep models are available, along
with the tools to generate and fit derived coefficients to your experimental data. Interactive (GUI) or
command line (batch) input is available.

The following topics concerning creep material curve fitting are available:
5.3.1. Understanding the Creep Material Curve-Fitting Process
5.3.2. Step 1. Prepare Experimental Data
5.3.3. Step 2. Input the Experimental Data
5.3.4. Step 3. Select a Material Model Option
5.3.5. Step 4. Initialize the Coefficients
5.3.6. Step 5. Specify Control Parameters and Solve
5.3.7. Step 6. Plot the Experimental Data and Analyze
5.3.8. Step 7. Write Data to the TB Command
5.3.9.Tips For Curve Fitting Creep Models

5.3.1. Understanding the Creep Material Curve-Fitting Process

The general process for creep curve fitting is defined as follows:

Step Detailed Information Found Comments

Here
1 Step 1. Prepare Experimental Data The experimental data must be a plain text file with
headers to describe the data types and attributes.The
test data must be delimited by a space or a comma.

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
134 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Creep Material Curve Fitting

Step Detailed Information Found Comments

Here
2 Step 2. Input the Experimental Data The experimental data can be read into the program by
browsing to the file location in the GUI or by specifying
the location on the command line.
3 Step 3. Select a Material Model Op- The material options for the applicable curve-fitting re-
tion gimen are defined via the TB command. Support is
offered for 13 implicit creep models. After you choose
a model, you can still switch to another model if an ideal
fit is not realized.
4 Step 4. Initialize the Coefficients Creep curve fitting is a nonlinear regression; the initial
values of the coefficients to be determined can be very
important for a successful solution.
5 Step 5. Specify Control Parameters Choose the error norm to be used for an acceptable
and Solve curve fit.
6 Step 6. Plot the Experimental Data Review and verify the results by comparing them with
and Analyze the experimental data and the regression errors. If they
are unacceptable, repeat steps 3 through 5 to obtain a
new curve-fitting solution.
7 Step 7.Write Data to the TB Com- Write the curve-fitting results in the TB command format
mand to the database.

5.3.2. Step 1. Prepare Experimental Data

You need to provide accurate experimental test data in order to achieve valid curve-fitting results. For
creep analyses, you use either the creep strain value or creep strain rate, derived as a function of time,
temperature, stress, and/or creep strain. The type of data you need to provide will depend on the creep
model you choose. The experimental data is named "creep" to distinguish it from other types of data,
such as uniaxial, tension, biaxial, etc. The creep data must be a plain text file that contains the headers
and the test data in table form, delimited by a space or a comma.

The header is used to describe the data types that characterize the test data columns or attributes of
the data. Five different creep data types are available:

Table 5.5 Creep Data Types and Abbreviations

Time time
Equivalent Creep Strain creq
Equivalent Creep Strain Rate dcreq
Equivalent Stress seqv
Temperature temp

The header format to define each column's data type is /n, abbr, where n is the index of the data column
in the file, and abbr is the abbreviation for the type of data in the column, as described in Table 5.5: Creep
Data Types and Abbreviations (p. 135).

Following is a typical data input file:

/1,seqv ! indicates first column is stress
/2,creq ! indicates second column is creep strain
/3,temp ! indicates third column is temperature

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 135
Chapter 5: Material Curve Fitting

/4,dcreq ! indicates fourth column is creep strain rate

4000 0.00215869 100 0.000203055
4000 0.00406109 100 0.000181314
4000 0.00664691 100 0.000165303
4000 0.0102068 100 0.000152217
4000 0.0151416 100 0.000140946

When a particular column is unchanged over the loading history, you can define it as an attribute. For
instance, in the above example, the stress and temperature are constant throughout the range. You
define this data as an attribute.

The header format to define a data attribute is /attr, value, where attr is the data-type abbreviation, and
value is the value of the attribute. The constant stress and temperature values above can be written
into the file header, as follows:
/seqv,4000 ! indicate this creep has a constant stress of 4000
/temp,100 ! indicate this creep data is at a constant temperature of 100
/1,creq ! indicate first column is creep strain
/2,dcreq ! indicate second column is creep strain rate
0.00215869 0.000203055
0.00406109 0.000181314
0.00664691 0.000165303
0.0102068 0.000152217
0.0151416 0.000140946
0.0220102 0.000130945

Thirteen model types are available for creep curve fitting. The model you choose determines the exper-
imental data required for the curve-fitting process. The following table describes the creep data required
to perform curve fitting for each model type. Note that for strain hardening and modified strain
hardening, you need to input both creep strain and creep strain rate in the experimental data.

Table 5.6 Creep Model and Data/Type Attribute

Creep Model creq dcreq time seqv temp
Strain Hardening x x x x
Time Hardening x x x x
Generalized Exponential x x x x
Generalized Graham x x x x
Generalized Blackburn x x x
Modified Time Hardening x x x x
Modified Strain Hardening x x x x
Generalized Garofalo x x x
Exponential Form x x x
Norton x x x
Combined Time Hardening x x x x
Prim+Sec Rational Polynomial x x x
Generalized Time Hardening x x x x

5.3.3. Step 2. Input the Experimental Data

The experimental data must be read in from a plain text file. Prepare this file according to the previous
section, including both header information and formatted test data. The header portion is required for
creep analyses.

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
136 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Creep Material Curve Fitting

Each file is viewed as a data set, and can be a complete set of experimental test data or a part of a
series of files of experimental test data. You can include several data sets, such as tests performed at
different loading conditions, strain ranges, and temperatures.

Input your experimental data using either the batch method or the GUI method.

5.3.3.1. Batch Method

The EADD argument on the TBFT command is used to identify and specify the location of your data
files. The command syntax is:
TBFT,EADD,ID,Option1,Option2,Option3,Option4

where:

ID = Index corresponding to the material number

Option1 = creep
Option2 = name of file containing experimental data
Option3 = file name extension
Option4 = file directory

5.3.3.2. GUI Method

In interactive mode, you can input experimental data by typing the filename (with the appropriate path
if the file is not in the default directory) into the appropriate area. You can also browse to a file in a
particular location. Click on Add Data Set to add additional data sets for creep curve fitting. There is
no restriction on the number of data sets you can add.

5.3.4. Step 3. Select a Material Model Option

The models available for creep curve fitting are defined in Table 5.7: Creep Models and Abbreviations (p. 138).
Select the one that best satisfies your requirements, and use the creep model abbreviation from the
table in subsequent fitting operations. It is helpful to view the formula before solving, as you can better
determine the initial coefficients to use and the format of your experimental data.

See Table 5.7: Creep Models and Abbreviations (p. 138) to determine a starting point for the initial creep
model coefficients.

5.3.4.1. Batch Method

TBFT,FADD,ID,CREEP,Option2,Option3

where:

ID = Index corresponding to the material number

Option2 = creep model abbreviation. See Table 5.7: Creep Models and Abbreviations (p. 138).
Option3 = not used for creep curve fitting.

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 137
Chapter 5: Material Curve Fitting

The following table describes the creep models available and their abbreviated names for Option2
(above).

Table 5.7 Creep Models and Abbreviations

Model Name Fitting
Number Name/Option2
1 Strain Hardening shar
2 Time Hardening thar
3 Generalized Exponential gexp
4 Generalized Graham ggra
5 Generalized Blackburn gbla
6 Modified Time Hardening mtha
7 Modified Strain Hardening msha
8 Generalized Garofalo ggar
9 Exponential Form expo
10 Norton nort
11 Prim+Sec Time Hardening psth
12 Prim+Sec Rational Polynomial psrp
13 Generalized Time Hardening gtha

The experimental data must be consistent with the creep model you choose. See Table 5.6: Creep Model
and Data/Type Attribute (p. 136) for the data types required for each creep model.

5.3.4.2. GUI Method

You can pick the appropriate model option from a menu in the data entry area. All of the options and
constraints listed for batch input apply.

5.3.5. Step 4. Initialize the Coefficients

Creep curve fitting is a nonlinear regression process. A successful curve fit depends greatly on the initial
coefficient values; certain variances will prevent your curve fit from converging. When a solution doesn't
converge, you can adjust the initial value of specific coefficients and rerun the problem (you do not
need to input the data again). In general, the more parameters a model has, the more difficult it is to
get the solution to converge.

Models with many parameters will sometimes converge more easily if you fix (hold constant) your
coefficients. You specify a value for a coefficient and keep it unchanged, while allowing the other
coefficients to be operated on. You can then release the fixed coefficients to obtain a solution. By default,
all of the coefficients are free to vary.

Although some creep models implicitly address temperature dependency, other models lack this cap-
ability. For both types of models, you can account for temperature dependency by generating coefficients
at discrete temperature values.

Solve for separate coefficients at each of your desired discrete temperatures. If the equation implicitly
supports temperature dependency already, that portion is eliminated by appropriately fixing the coef-

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
138 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Creep Material Curve Fitting

ficient to a specific value. For example, if you have e(-C*T), then C is set to 0 to eliminate this term. To
do this, you activate temperature dependency by setting the tdep parameter to 1.

For temperature-dependent experimental data, you enable temperature-dependency and specify a

reference temperature before solving for the coefficients. You can set the reference temperature only
to values specified using the /temp,value header line in the experimental data.

You can also specify tref = all and initiate multiple solves to evaluate coefficients at all available discrete
temperature values. In this case, for data at three temperatures (t1, t2, and t3), a single TBFT,SOLVE
entry will initiate three different solve operations at those three discrete temperatures.

With temperature dependency on and the reference temperature set to a particular value, a TBFT,SOLVE
command solves for coefficients only at that temperature. To solve for coefficients at other temperatures,
you set the reference temperature to each of the desired discrete temperature values and solve again.

You can initialize the coefficients before or after turning temperature dependency on. If the coefficients
are initialized before turning temperature dependency on, the specified coefficients will become the
initial coefficients for all future solves for that particular model. These coefficients are, however, overridden
when temperature dependency is turned on and another set of initial values is specified at discrete
temperatures. The curve-fitting tool looks for the initial coefficients at a particular temperature. If no
coefficients are specified at discrete temperatures, the initial coefficients set before temperature depend-
ency was turned on are used.

5.3.5.1. Batch Method

Define your coefficient values and temperature dependency using the SET option of the TBFT command,
as follows:
TBFT,SET,ID,CREEP,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5

where:

ID = Index corresponding to the material number

Option2 = creep model name
Option3 = order, if applicable
Option4 = index of coefficient
Option5 = value of coefficient
To modify the coefficients, use the FIX option of the TBFT command.
TBFT,FIX,ID,CREEP,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5

where:

ID = Index corresponding to the material number

Option2 = creep model name
Option3 = order, if applicable
Option4 = index of coefficient
Option5 = 0 - variable, 1 - fixed
TBFT,SET,ID,CREEP,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5

where:

ID = Index corresponding to the material number

Option2 = creep model name
Option3 = order, if applicable

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 139
Chapter 5: Material Curve Fitting

Option4 = tdep or tref

Option5 = For Option4 = tdep, 1 to activate, 0 to deactivate. For Option4 = tdep, a specific
temp value, or “all.”

5.3.5.2. GUI Method

The models listed in Table 5.7: Creep Models and Abbreviations (p. 138) are available directly from the GUI.
When you select a model from the available options, the program automatically configures the coefficients
for the model. You can then make modifications, including initializing and/or fixing certain coefficients.

5.3.6. Step 5. Specify Control Parameters and Solve

Your error norm, your maximum number iterations allowed, and your error tolerance will affect the
accuracy of your results. There are two available error norms available for the regression. The default
error norm calculation option is normalized curve fitting. It usually yields better results than non-nor-
malized curve fitting, since normalized fitting gives equal weight to all data points when minimizing
the error norms.

Other available solve criteria are number of iterations, residual tolerance, and coefficient change tolerance.
The solution stops when both residual tolerance and coefficient change tolerance is met or if the
number of iterations criteria is met. The coefficients are updated after every iteration during the solve
process.

5.3.6.1. Batch Method

The batch command is:
TBFT,SOLVE,ID,CREEP,Option2,Option3,Option4, ..., Option7

where:

ID = Index corresponding to the material number

Option2 = creep function name (See Table 5.7: Creep Models and Abbreviations (p. 138))
Option3 = ((Blank--not applicable for creep models)
Option4 = Error norm: 0 = non-normalized, 1 = normalized (default)
Option5 = Maximum number of iterations
Option6 = Tolerance of residual changes
Option7 = Tolerance of coefficient changes

Other solving parameters are available. See the TBFT command for details.

5.3.6.2. GUI Method

After you fill in the last set of coefficient values, the analysis moves automatically to the solution phase.
Each of the options specified in the command line description is presented as a pull down menu or fill
in box, and each option must be specified before Solve will begin. The coefficients are updated in the
GUI after the solution is complete.

5.3.7. Step 6. Plot the Experimental Data and Analyze

After you initiate Solve, the coefficient tables will contain the fitted coefficients and also the residual
errors. You can then plot your data and visually interpret the results. Column one is your X- axis, with
each additional column plotted separately as a function of column one.

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
140 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Creep Material Curve Fitting

You should reserve column one for the variable that you would like to see vary in the plot. For example,
if your data contains time, temperature, stress and creep strain, you may wish to see the creep strain
vary as a function of time, at different temperatures and stresses in the plot. Add your experimental
data using multiple TBFT,EADD commands (or the corresponding GUI method). Split the file into multiple
experimental fields as prescribed earlier, one for each combination of temperature and stress.

Right mouse button (RMB) functions allow you to Zoom, Fit, Save Plot to File, View/Hide Legend and
View/Hide Grid. Two or more fitted functions can also be compared in the same plot. For example, you
can view Mooney2 Uniaxial and Mooney9 Uniaxial plots right on top of each other, provided both of
these function are already solved for. RMB also allows you to see the number of points used to generate
the plot, and also change the Minimum X Value and the Maximum X Value in a plot. You can use the
middle-mouse button (context sensitive) to hide a particular curve within a graph.

5.3.7.1. GUI Method

You can simultaneously display many data sets for each function plotted. Each window of your display
can be used to display each one of the data sets you are plotting against column one.

5.3.7.2. Analyze Your Curves for Proper Fit

Use the GUI to graphically review the curve-fitting result and ensure a good fit throughout the range
of data. Use the plotted curve-fitting results both to determine the degree of fit at various locations
and to verify the error norm/residual value. You can then determine the quality of a curve fitting and
decide whether to accept the results. If the results are unacceptable, you may want to go back to step
3, and then solve again with a new model, redefining certain initial values of the coefficients, and also
modifying some of the other control parameters. You can continue to use your experimental data, re-
peating step 3 through step 6 until you obtain a satisfactory solution.

5.3.8. Step 7. Write Data to the TB Command

After you are satisfied with your curve-fitting results, you can write the curve-fitting data to the database
using TBFT, FSET. The GUI or the command line converts the coefficients to the appropriate form before
writing to TB tables. The data is stored as part of the material property set for use in subsequent analyses.

5.3.8.1. Batch Method

TBFT,FSET,ID,CREEP,Option2,Option3

where:

ID = Index corresponding to the material number

Option2 = Creep model abbreviation
Option3 = (Blank--not applicable)

5.3.8.2. GUI Method

When you complete the process, click the Write to Database button to write the fitted coefficients of
your creep model as a creep data table in the material database. You are then returned to the material
properties dialog. The curve data can now be accessed for the full range of material behavior.

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 141
Chapter 5: Material Curve Fitting

5.3.9. Tips For Curve Fitting Creep Models

The following tips can help to ensure successful curve fitting. They are only suggestions, and do not
represent a singular method or strategy. Also, following them does not guarantee a solution. Refer to
Creep Equations for additional details about each implicit creep model.

Strain Hardening Strain hardening has 4 coefficients, with C4 dedicated to temperature

dependency. If you do not have temperature-dependent data, set C4
to zero. If you have difficulty solving temperature-dependent data,
use experimental data for only one temperature and fix C4 to zero.
Solve, and then add data for your other temperatures.Then release
C4 and solve for all coefficients.You can also solve for just C4 by fixing
the C1, C2 and C3 values.
Time Hardening Time hardening has 4 coefficients, with C4 dedicated to temperature
dependency. If you do not have temperature-dependent data, set C4
to zero. If you have difficulty solving temperature-dependent data,
use experimental data for only one temperature and fix C4 to zero.
Solve, and then add data for your other temperatures.Then release
C4 and solve for all coefficients.You can also solve for just C4 by fixing
the C1, C2 and C3 values.
Generalized Exponential Generalized exponential has 5 coefficients, with C4 dedicated to
temperature dependency. If you do not have temperature-dependent
data, set C4 to zero. Use a low value for C5 (e.g., 1e-3) to avoid floating-
point overflows in the exponential term. If you have difficulty solving
for temperature-dependent data, use experimental data for only one
temperature, fix C4 to zero, then solve.Then add data for your other
temperatures, release C4 and solve for all coefficients.You can also
solve for just C4 by fixing C1, C2 and C3.
Generalized Graham Generalized Graham has 8 coefficients.You use C8 for temperature
dependency. If you do not have temperature-dependent data, set C8
to zero. If you have difficulty solving temperature-dependent data,
use experimental data for only one temperature, fix C8 to zero, and
solve.Then add data for other temperatures, release C8 and solve for
the remaining coefficients individually.
Generalized Blackburn Generalized Blackburn has 7 coefficients. It is advisable to look at the
exponential terms and try to keep them from floating-point overflows.
To keep eC2σ within floating-point range, make sure the initial value
of C2 is such that C2σ is close to 1. Similarly try to keep σ/C4 and C7σ
close to 1.
Modified Time Harden- Modified time hardening has 4 coefficients. C4 is for temperature
ing dependency. If you do not have temperature-dependent data, fix C4
to zero.
Modified Strain Harden- Modified Strain Hardening has 3 coefficients.This model can be
ing C2 C
complex for curve fitting.To keep the 1σ 3 + ε term from
going negative, C1 is replaced with C12 but converted to the proper
form before beings written to the database.
Generalized Garofalo Generalized Garofalo has 4 coefficients, with C4 dedicated to temper-
ature dependency. If you do not have temperature-dependent data,

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
142 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Chaboche Material Curve Fitting

set C4 to zero. To keep the Sinh term within floating-point range, keep
c2σ close to one when you initialize the coefficients.
Exponential Form Exponential form has 3 coefficients, with C3 dedicated to temperature
dependency. If you do not have temperature-dependent data, set C3
to zero.To keep eσC2 within floating-point range, keep σ/C2 close to
one.
Norton Norton model has 3 coefficients, with C3 dedicated to temperature
dependency. If you do not have temperature-dependent data, set C3
to zero.
Prim+Sec Time Harden- Time hardening has 7 coefficients.This is a complex model. Here it is
ing advisable to solve for temperature independent data first and then
introduce temperature related data.
Prim+Sec Rational Poly- Rational polynomial is a very complex model for curve fitting, with
nomial 10 coefficients. If you find it hard to fit this data, it is advisable that
you split the experimental data into primary creep data and secondary
creep data. Primary creep data is the initial part of the curve that
covers the nonlinearity in the strain rate. Fit only the secondary data
by fixing C1 to 1 and then set all other coefficients except C2, C3 and
C4 to zero. Use a low value of C3 to keep 10C3σ within floating-point
range. Coefficients C5 to C10 in curve fitting refers to coefficients C7
to C12 in the implicit creep equation (rational polynomial).Then add
the primary creep data, release all coefficients, and solve.
Generalized Time Generalized time hardening has 6 coefficients. Set C6 to zero if you
Hardening have temperature independent data. When initializing coefficients
set C5σ close to 1 to avoid floating-point overflows.

5.4. Chaboche Material Curve Fitting

Chaboche material curve fitting determines your material constants by relating your experimental data
to the Chaboche nonlinear kinematic hardening model.

Curve fitting is performed either interactively or via batch commands. You can fit uniaxial plastic strain
vs. stress data, along with discrete temperature dependencies for multiple data sets.

The following topics concerning Chaboche material curve fitting are available:
5.4.1. Understanding the Chaboche Material Curve-Fitting Process
5.4.2. Step 1. Prepare Experimental Data
5.4.3. Step 2. Input the Experimental Data
5.4.4. Step 3. Select a Material Model Option
5.4.5. Step 4. Initialize the Coefficients
5.4.6. Step 5. Specify Control Parameters and Solve
5.4.7. Step 6. Plot the Experimental Data and Analyze
5.4.8. Step 7. Write Data to the TB Command

5.4.1. Understanding the Chaboche Material Curve-Fitting Process

Following is the general process for using curve fitting to determine the coefficients for the Chaboche
material model:

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 143
Chapter 5: Material Curve Fitting

Step Detailed Information Found Comments

Here
1 Step 1. Prepare Experimental Data The experimental data must be a plain text file with
headers to describe the data types and attributes.The
test data must be delimited by a space or a comma.
2 Step 2. Input the Experimental Data The experimental data can be read into the program by
browsing to the file location in the GUI or by specifying
the location on the command line.
3 Step 3. Select a Material Model Op- The material options for the applicable curve-fitting re-
tion gimen are defined (TBFT).This step includes selecting
the kinematic hardening model.
4 Step 4. Initialize the Coefficients Chaboche curve fitting is a nonlinear regression; the
initial values of the coefficients to be determined is im-
portant for a successful solution.
5 Step 5. Specify Control Parameters Specify the error norm to be used, the solution control
and Solve parameters, and perform the nonlinear regression.
6 Step 6. Plot the Experimental Data Review and verify the results by comparing them with
and Analyze the experimental data and the regression errors. If any
factor is unacceptable, repeat steps 3 through 5 to obtain
a new curve-fitting solution.
7 Step 7.Write Data to the TB Com- Write the curve-fitting results in the TB command format
mand to the database.

5.4.2. Step 1. Prepare Experimental Data

Curve fitting requires experimental test data. To use curve fitting with plasticity, the only experimental
data supported is uniaxial test data. Uniaxial test data has two columns, plastic strain and true stress.
Experimental data for plasticity is path dependent.

Your uniaxial test data must be a plain text file with headers to define the test data. The data file should
be in table format, delimited by spaces or commas. Headers can be used to describe the data types
that characterize the test data columns or additional attributes of the data.

For Chaboche curve fitting with multiple temperatures, you can evaluate coefficients at each discrete
temperature point and write it as a temperature-dependent Chaboche data table. A separate data file
is necessary for each discrete temperature.

Issue this command at the top of the experimental data file to specify the temperature for the experiment:
/temp,TempValue

where TempValue is your specified temperature.

Following is a typical data input file:

/temp,100 ! define temperature attribute
4.57E-06 2.43E+02
4.89E-04 2.67E+02
1.01E-03 2.83E+02
1.55E-03 2.94E+02
2.11E-03 3.02E+02
2.68E-03 3.09E+02
3.26E-03 3.14E+02
3.84E-03 3.18E+02

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
144 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Chaboche Material Curve Fitting

4.42E-03 3.22E+02
4.42E-03 7.78E+01
4.41E-03 -1.65E+02
3.54E-03 -2.31E+02
2.51E-03 -2.66E+02
1.40E-03 -2.84E+02
2.49E-04 -2.95E+02
-9.11E-04 -3.03E+02
-2.08E-03 -3.10E+02
-3.24E-03 -3.17E+02
-4.41E-03 -3.24E+02
-4.41E-03 -7.95E+01
-4.40E-03 1.63E+02
-3.53E-03 2.30E+02
-2.50E-03 2.65E+02
-1.39E-03 2.83E+02
-2.44E-04 2.94E+02
9.16E-04 3.02E+02
2.08E-03 3.09E+02
3.25E-03 3.16E+02
4.41E-03 3.23E+02
4.41E-03 7.87E+01
4.41E-03 -1.64E+02
3.53E-03 -2.31E+02
2.51E-03 -2.66E+02
1.40E-03 -2.84E+02
2.48E-04 -2.95E+02

Uniaxial test data can include loading, unloading, and cyclic loading.

For plasticity, experimental data is path-dependent and the stress-strain behavior depends on the history
of the loading and/or unloading.

5.4.3. Step 2. Input the Experimental Data

The experimental data must be read in from a plain text file (TBFT,EADD). Prepare this file as described
in Step 1. Prepare Experimental Data.

Each file is viewed as a data set, and can be a complete set of experimental test data or a part of a
series of files of experimental test data. You can include several data sets, such as tests performed at
different stress levels and/or temperatures, when you perform creep curve fitting.

Input your experimental data using either the batch method or the GUI method.

5.4.3.1. Batch Method

Issue this command to identify and specify the location of a data file:
TBFT,EADD,ID,Option1,Option2,Option3,Option4

where:

ID = Index corresponding to the material number

Option1 = Experimental data type UNIA (uniaxial test data)
Option2 = Experimental data file name
Option3 = File name extension
Option4 = File directory

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 145
Chapter 5: Material Curve Fitting

5.4.3.2. GUI Method

Click on Add Data Set and enter the experimental data file name in the field provided. You can also
browse to a file in a specified location. Separate input is performed for each data type (Option1 =
SDEC or BDEC) /

5.4.4. Step 3. Select a Material Model Option

The TBFT command provides the curve-fitting tools for Chaboche material modeling.

To define the material model, you must first specify a case name, then specify the order of Chaboche
kinematic model.

After you create a case, the number of Chaboche terms cannot be changed without deleting the case.
Additional cases can be created to model Chaboche kinematic hardening with different orders.

5.4.4.1. Batch Method

Define a Chaboche material model by defining a case (TBFT,FCASE), then specifying the order of kin-
ematic hardening model. The case is created only after the TBFT,FCASE,ID,FINISH command ex-
ecutes.

The following syntax examples and argument descriptions illustrate a complete case definition:
TBFT,FCASE,ID,NEW,Option2,Option3 ! define case

where:

ID = Index corresponding to the material number

Option2 = CPLA
Option3 = Your specified case name
TBFT,FADD,ID,Category,Option2,Option3 ! specify kinematic hardening model

where:

ID = Index corresponding to the material number

Category = PLAS
Option2 = CHABOCHE
Option3 = Dependent on Option2 (where Option2 = CHABOCHE, so Option3 = 1 to N
TBFT,FCASE,ID,FINISH ! create case

5.4.4.2. GUI Method

Interactively navigate the tree structure of the curve-fitting window. Select the order of the Chaboche
model, and enter the appropriate case name in the text box field. As you select the options, the coefficient
table is created automatically.

5.4.5. Step 4. Initialize the Coefficients

The initial values chosen for your coefficients (TBFT,SET) determines the success of the curve-fitting
operation.

The number of parameter depends on the order of the Chaboche model. For a Chaboche model of order
N, there are 2*N+1 coefficients. Coefficients 1 through 2*N are Chaboche parameters, and coefficient

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
146 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Chaboche Material Curve Fitting

2*N+1 is the yield stress. The odd coefficients in the Chaboche model refer to the slope of the curve
and the even coefficients are decay function parameters. The number of terms depend on the complexity
of the curve. Evenly distributed estimates of the slope over the range of the curve can be used as initial
guesses for the curve-fitting process. Different terms can dominate at different parts of the curve. Initial
guesses for the decay parameters can typically be chosen one or two orders less than odd coefficients
(slope).

You can also fix (hold constant) your coefficients (TBFT,FIX). Specify a value for a coefficient and keep
it unchanged, while allowing the other coefficients to be operated on. You can then release the fixed
coefficient later if desired. By default, all of the coefficients are free to vary.

Estimate coefficients for temperature-dependent data by setting the temperature-dependency flag and
setting a reference temperature before solving for the coefficients. You can set the reference temperature
only to values specified via the /temp,TempValue header line in the experimental data.

You can also specify tref = all and initiate multiple solves to evaluate coefficients at all available
discrete temperature values. In this case, for data at three temperatures (t1, t2, and t3), a single
TBFT,SOLVE command initiates three separate solve operations at those three discrete temperature
values, and generates data at three corresponding discrete temperatures.

With temperature dependency specified and the reference temperature set to a specific value, a
TBFT,SOLVE command solves for coefficients only at that discrete temperature. To solve for coefficients
at other temperatures, set the reference temperature to each of the desired discrete temperature values
and solve again.

You can initialize the coefficients before or after activating temperature dependency. If the coefficients
initialize before setting temperature dependency, the specified coefficients become the initial coefficients
for all future solves for that particular model. These coefficients are, however, overridden when temper-
ature dependency is active and another set of values is specified at a discrete temperature value. The
curve-fitting tool looks for the initial coefficients at a particular temperature. If no coefficients are specified
at discrete temperature values, the initial coefficients set before temperature dependency was activated
are used.

5.4.5.1. Batch Method

The following syntax example and argument descriptions illustrate coefficient initialization:
TBFT,SET,ID,CASE,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5

where:

ID = Index corresponding to the material number

Option2 = Case name
Option3 = (Blank--not applicable)
Option4 = Index of coefficient
Option5 = Value of coefficient

Example 5.3 Initialize Coefficients

TBFT,SET,1,case1,,1,1.2 ! Initialize the first coefficient to 1.2
TBFT,SET,1,case1,,2,1.5 ! Initialize the second coefficient to 1.5

By default, coefficients are not fixed. To fix a coefficient to a value set via the TBFT,SET command, or
to release a previously fixed coefficient, issue the TBFT,FIX command.
TBFT,FIX,ID,CASE,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 147
Chapter 5: Material Curve Fitting

where:

ID = Index corresponding to the material number

Option2 = Case name
Option3 = (Blank--not applicable)
Option4 = Index of coefficient
Option5 = 1 to fix, 0 to vary (default)

Temperature dependency uses Option4 and references your specified data files with the appropriate
“temp” header:
TBFT,SET,ID,CASE,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5

where:

ID = Index corresponding to the material number

Option2 = Case name
Option3 = (Blank--not applicable)
Option4 = tdep or tref
Option5 = If Option4 = tdep, then 1 activates temperature dependency 0 deactivates it. If Op-
tion4 = tref, this value is either a specific temperature or all temperatures (ALL).

Example 5.4 Fixing Coefficient Values

TBFT,FIX,1, case1,,1,1 ! Fix the first coefficient to a value set via TBFT,SET
TBFT,FIX,1, case1,,2,1 ! Fix the second coefficient to a value set via TBFT,SET

5.4.5.2. GUI Method

The coefficients table is updated automatically in the Chaboche curve-fitting window when the order
of kinematic hardening model is specified. Specify values for your coefficients in the coefficients table
in the curve-fitting GUI window, and check the appropriate boxes to fix them or allow them to vary.

5.4.6. Step 5. Specify Control Parameters and Solve

Chaboche curve fitting is a nonlinear regression process. Only the non-normalized error norm is available
for the regression.

The solution control parameters for nonlinear regression include number of iterations, residual tolerance,
and coefficient change tolerance. The solution stops when both residual tolerance of the error norm
and coefficient change tolerance is met, or if the number of iterations criteria is met. The coefficients
are updated when the solution is completed.

5.4.6.1. Temperature-Dependent Solutions

Separate coefficients at each temperate must be calculated to account for temperature dependency.
Perform the regression as follows:

1. Set the temperature-dependency flag (TBFT,SET,,,,,TDEP,1).

2. Solve for all (tref = ALL) coefficients.
a. Set the reference temperature at which your partial solution should be performed
(TBFT,SET,,,,,TREF,TX). Only data at temperature TX is used to estimate the combined plasticity
coefficients.
b. Initialize the coefficients.

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
148 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Chaboche Material Curve Fitting

c. Solve (TBFT,SOLVE).

Repeat the regression process for all desired temperatures.

5.4.6.2. Batch Method

The following syntax examples and argument descriptions illustrate how to set control parameters and
solve:
TBFT,SET,ID,CASE,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5

where:

ID = Index corresponding to the material number

Option2 = Case name
Option3 = (Blank--not applicable)
Option4 = tdep
Option5 = 1 to activate temperature dependency, 0 to deactivate (default)
TBFT,SET,ID,CASE,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5

where:

ID = Index corresponding to the material number

Option2 = Case name
Option3 = (Blank--not applicable)
Option4 = tref
Option5 = Valid temperature values found in the experimental data

The SOLVE option allows you to specify procedure types, tolerances, and the number of iterations:
TBFT,SOLVE,ID,CASE,Option2,Option3,Option4, ... , Option7

where:

ID = Index corresponding to the material number

Option2 = Case name
Option3 = (Blank--not applicable)
Option4 = Curve-fitting procedure: 0 = non-normalized least squares
Option5 = Maximum number of iterations
Option6 = Residual change tolerance
Option7 = Coefficient change tolerance

Other parameters for solving are available. See the TBFT command for more information.

5.4.6.3. GUI Method

The GUI allows you to choose your error norm, solution control parameters, and solver options. After
you complete these specifications and solve, you can go back and modify your parameters as necessary
to obtain a good curve fit.

5.4.7. Step 6. Plot the Experimental Data and Analyze

The best method for ensuring a good fit between your experimental data and the provided curves is
to plot your curves and visually inspect them via the GUI. The Graph button provides a direct means
for plotting the data.

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 149
Chapter 5: Material Curve Fitting

5.4.7.1. Analyzing Your Curves for Proper Fit

All of your data is plotted as a function of column 1 (X axis). Column 2 (Y axis) and the corresponding
fitted data are plotted as a function of column 1. Two or more fitted functions can be compared in the
same plot.

Take advantage of the right-mouse-button (RMB) functions to zoom, fit, save your plot to a file, view
or hide objects, toggle between log scale and regular scale, and so on. With the middle mouse button,
you can eliminate specific curves from each window's display in order to view the remaining data more
clearly.

After plotting the curve-fitting results, you can then review multiple plots and also verify the error
norm/residual value displayed in the curve-fitting GUI window. This information helps you to determine
the quality of a curve fit and decide whether or not to accept the results.

If the curve-fitting results are unsatisfactory, you may want to go back to Step 3. Select a Material
Model Option and solve again by changing the order of the Chaboche model or other options, redefining
certain initial values of the coefficients, and possibly redefining other control parameters. You can
continue to use your original data, repeating step 3 through step 6 until you are satisfied with the
solution.

5.4.8. Step 7. Write Data to the TB Command

After a successful curve fitting, the last step is to write the curve-fitting data as a Chaboche data table
(TB,CHABOCHE) to the database. The program converts the coefficients to the appropriate form before
writing to the database.

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
150 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 6: Material Model Combinations
You can combine several of the material model options discussed in this chapter to simulate various
material behaviors. Table 6.1: Material Model Combination Possibilities (p. 151) presents the model options
you can combine along with the associated TB command labels, and links to sample input listings located
under Material Model Combinations in the Structural Analysis Guide.

Table 6.1 Material Model Combination Possibilities

Model With ... Combina- Command, Label Link to Example
tion Type
Combined BISO and CHAB Ex-
Plasticity Bilinear TB,BISO + TB,CHAB
Hardening ample
Combined MISO and CHAB Ex-
Plasticity Multilinear TB,MISO + TB,CHAB
Hardening ample
PLAS (Multilinear Iso-
Combined TB, PLAS,,,,MISO +
Plasticity Multilinear tropic Hardening)
Hardening TB,CHAB
and CHAB Example
Combined NLISO and CHAB Ex-
Plasticity Nonlinear TB,NLISO + TB,CHAB
Hardening ample
Combined TB,PLAS,,,,MISO + PLAS (MISO) and EDP
Plasticity Multilinear
Hardening TB,EDP Example
Combined MISO and EDP Ex-
Plasticity Multilinear TB,MISO+ TB,EDP
Hardening ample
Isotropic TB,PLAS,,,,BISO + BISO and RATE Ex-
Viscoplasticity Bilinear
Hardening TB,EDP ample
Isotropic MISO and RATE Ex-
Viscoplasticity Multilinear TB,MISO + TB,RATE
Hardening ample
Isotropic TB,PLAS,,,,MISO + PLAS (MISO) and
Viscoplasticity Multilinear
Hardening TB,RATE RATE Example
Isotropic NLISO and RATE Ex-
Viscoplasticity Nonlinear TB,NLISO + TB,RATE
Hardening ample
Combined TB,CHAB+ CHAB and RATE and
Viscoplasticity Nonlinear
Hardening TB,RATE+TB,BISO BISO Example
Combined TB,CHAB+ CHAB and RATE and
Viscoplasticity Nonlinear
Hardening TB,RATE+TB,MISO MISO Example
Combined TB,CHAB+ CHAB and RATE and
Viscoplasticity Nonlinear
Hardening TB,RATE+TB,PLASTIC PLASTIC Example
Combined TB,CHAB+ CHAB and RATE and
Viscoplasticity Nonlinear
Hardening TB,RATE+TB,NLISO NLISO Example
Isotropic GURSON and BISO
Gurson Plasticity Bilinear TB,GURS + TB,BISO
Hardening Example

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 151
Chapter 6: Material Model Combinations

Model With ... Combina- Command, Label Link to Example

tion Type
Isotropic GURSON and MISO
Gurson Plasticity Multilinear TB,GURS + TB,MISO
Hardening Example
Isotropic TB,GURS + TB,PLAS,,, GURSON and PLAS
Gurson Plasticity Multilinear
Hardening MISO (MISO) Example
Isotropic GURSON and NLISO
Gurson Plasticity Nonlinear TB,GURS + TB,NLISO
Hardening Example
Plasticity and Isotropic BISO and CREEP Ex-
Bilinear TB,BISO + TB,CREEP
Creep (Implicit) Hardening ample
Plasticity and Isotropic MISO and CREEP Ex-
Multilinear TB,MISO + TB,CREEP
Creep (Implicit) Hardening ample
Plasticity and Isotropic TBPLAS,,,,MISO + PLAS (MISO) and
Multilinear
Creep (Implicit) Hardening TB,CREEP CREEP Example
Plasticity and Isotropic NLISO and CREEP Ex-
Nonlinear TB,NLISO + TB,CREEP
Creep (Implicit) Hardening ample
Plasticity and Kinematic BKIN and CREEP Ex-
Bilinear TB,BKIN + TB,CREEP
Creep (Implicit) Hardening ample
Anisotropic Plas- Isotropic HILL and BISO Ex-
Bilinear TB,HILL + TB,BISO
ticity Hardening ample
Anisotropic Plas- Isotropic HILL and MISO Ex-
Multilinear TB,HILL + TB,MISO
ticity Hardening ample
Anisotropic Plas- Isotropic TB,HILL + HILL and PLAS (MISO)
Multilinear
ticity Hardening TBPLAS,,,,MISO Example
Anisotropic Plas- Isotropic HILL and NLISO Ex-
Nonlinear TB,HILL + TB,NLSIO
ticity Hardening ample
Anisotropic Plas- Kinematic HILL and BKIN Ex-
Bilinear TB,HILL + TB,BKIN
ticity Hardening ample
Anisotropic Plas- Kinematic HILL and MKIN Ex-
Multilinear TB,HILL + TB,MKIN
ticity Hardening ample
Anisotropic Plas- Kinematic HILL and KINH Ex-
Multilinear TB,HILL + TB,/ KINH
ticity Hardening ample
Anisotropic Plas- Kinematic TB,HILL + TBPLAS,,,, HILL and PLAS (KINH)
Multilinear
ticity Hardening KINH Example
Anisotropic Plas- Kinematic HILL and CHAB Ex-
Chaboche TB,HILL + TB,CHAB
ticity Hardening ample
Bilinear Iso- HILL and BISO and
Anisotropic Plas- Combined TB,HILL + TB,BISO +
tropic and CHAB Example
ticity Hardening TB,CHAB
Chaboche
Multilinear HILL and MISO and
Anisotropic Plas- Combined Isotropic TB,HILL + TB,MISO + CHAB Example
ticity Hardening and TB,CHAB
Chaboche

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
152 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Model With ... Combina- Command, Label Link to Example
tion Type
Multilinear HILL and PLAS (MISO)
TB,HILL +
Anisotropic Plas- Combined Isotropic and CHAB Example
TB,PLAS,,,,MISO +
ticity Hardening and
TB,CHAB
Chaboche
Nonlinear HILL and NLISO and
Anisotropic Plas- Combined Isotropic TB,HILL + TB,NLISO + CHAB Example
ticity Hardening and TB,CHAB
Chaboche
Anisotropic Vis- Isotropic TB,HILL + TB,RATE + HILL and RATE and
Bilinear
coplasticity Hardening TB,BISO BISO Example
Anisotropic Vis- Isotropic TB,HILL + TB,RATE + HILL and RATE and
Multilinear
coplasticity Hardening TB,MISO MISO Example
Anisotropic Vis- Isotropic TB,HILL + TB,RATE + HILL and RATE and
Nonlinear
coplasticity Hardening TB,NLISO NLISO Example
Anisotropic HILL and CREEP Ex-
--- TB,HILL + TB,CREEP
Creep (Implicit) ample
Anisotropic HILL and CREEP and
Isotropic TB,HILL + TB,CREEP
Creep and Plasti- Bilinear BISO Example
Hardening + TB,BISO
city (Implicit)
Anisotropic HILL and CREEP and
Isotropic TB,HILL + TB,CREEP
Creep and Plasti- Multilinear MISO Example
Hardening + TB,MISO
city (Implicit)
Anisotropic HILL and CREEP and
Isotropic TB,HILL + TB,CREEP
Creep and Plasti- Multilinear PLAS (MISO) Example
Hardening + TB,MISO
city (Implicit)
Anisotropic HILL and CREEP and
Isotropic TB,HILL + TB,CREEP
Creep and Plasti- Nonlinear NLISO Example
Hardening + TB,NLISO
city (Implicit)
Anisotropic HILL and CREEP and
Kinematic
Creep and Plasti- Bilinear TB,HILL + BKIN Example
Hardening
city (Implicit)
Finite Strain AHYPER and PRONY
Anisotropic Hy- Nonlinear
Visco-Aniso- TB,AHYPER + (Anisotropic Hypere-
perelasticity and Anisotropic
tropic Hypere- TB,PRONY lasticity and Vis-
Viscoelasticity Elasticity
lasticity coelasticity) Example
HYPER and PRONY
Hyperelasticity Finite Strain Nonlinear
TB,HYPER + (Hyperelasticity and
and Viscoelasti- Visco-Hypere- Isotropic
TB,PRONY Viscoelasticity) Ex-
city lasticity Elasticity
ample
Extended Druck- EDP and CREEP and
Bilinear, Mul- TB,EDP + TB,CREEP +
er-Prager (EDP) Isotropic PLAS (MISO) Example
tilinear, or TB,BISO or TB,MISO
and Creep (Impli- Hardening
Nonlinear or TB,NLISO
cit)

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 153
Chapter 6: Material Model Combinations

Model With ... Combina- Command, Label Link to Example

tion Type
Bilinear, Mul- TB,EDP + TB,CREEP + CAP and CREEP and
Cap and Creep Isotropic
tilinear, or TB,BISO or TB,MISO PLAS (MISO) Example
(Implicit) Hardening
Nonlinear or TB,NLISO

Following are cross-reference links to other sections in the documentation that provide descriptions of
the individual material model options represented in the table above.

• Bilinear Isotropic Hardening (TB,BISO)

• Bilinear Kinematic Hardening (TB,BKIN)
• Chaboche Nonlinear Kinematic Hardening (TB,CHAB)
• Creep (Implicit) (TB,CREEP) -- Also see Creep in the Structural Analysis Guide.
• Hill Anisotropy (TB,HILL]
• Multilinear Isotropic Hardening (TB,MISO)
• Multilinear Kinematic Hardening (TB,MKIN or KINH)
• Nonlinear Isotropic Hardening (TB,NLISO).
• Rate-Dependent Plasticity (TB,RATE)
• Hyperelasticity (TB,HYPER)
• Anisotropic Hyperelasticity (TB, AHYPER) -- Also see Anisotropic Hyperelasticity in the Mechanical APDL
Theory Reference.
• Viscoelasticity

Additional information about most these material model options is available under Plastic Material
Models in the Structural Analysis Guide.

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
154 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 7: Understanding Field Variable Interpolation
When you define field-dependent material properties via the TBFIELD and related TB commands, the
program uses linear interpolation between the data points you provide to determine specific material
property values. To do so, the program:

1. Creates a grid using your defined field data values.

2. Assumes that you have defined curve-based data and automatically provides the missing grid data
points.
3. Performs linear interpolation on this populated grid to find material property values.

The following related topics are available:

7.1. Data Processing
7.2. Example: One-Dimensional Interpolation
7.3. Example: Two-Dimensional Interpolation

7.1. Data Processing

Consider a case where isotropic friction (TB,FRIC) field data is dependent on both temperature and
sliding distance. Assume the following command input:
TB,FRIC,1,2, ,ISO
TBFIELD,TEMP,100.0
TBFIELD,SLDI,0.1
TBDATA,1,0.3
TBFIELD,SLDI,0.5
TBDATA,1,0.5
TBFIELD,TEMP,200.0
TBFIELD,SLDI,0.2
TBDATA,1,0.2
TBFIELD,SLDI,0.7
TBDATA,1,0.1

Listing the data shows a user-defined 4x2 grid:

(FRIC) Table For Material 1

Data for Isotropic friction

TEMPERATURE = 100.00
SLIDE DIST = 0.10000

FRICTION DIR. FRICTION COEFF.

1 0.30000

TEMPERATURE = 100.00
SLIDE DIST = 0.50000

FRICTION DIR. FRICTION COEFF.

1 0.50000

TEMPERATURE = 200.00
SLIDE DIST = 0.20000

FRICTION DIR. FRICTION COEFF.

1 0.20000

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 155
Chapter 7: Understanding Field Variable Interpolation

TEMPERATURE = 200.00
SLIDE DIST = 0.70000

FRICTION DIR. FRICTION COEFF.

1 0.10000

A tabular format represents the data in the 4x2 grid as shown:

Sliding Distance
Temperature 0.1 0.2 0.5 0.7
100 0.3 0.5
200 0.2 0.1

When defining tabular data, the first specified field variable forms the rows of the table. The subsequent
variables form the columns. In this example, Temperature is the first defined field variable.

In this case, the user defined only four out of a possible eight grid locations.

To populate the interpolation search space, the program fills the missing grid points in each row from
left to right. If the first or subsequent grid locations of a row are not defined, the program uses the first
defined value within the row to backfill the grid. The program then fills any undefined locations within
the grid by linearly interpolating between defined points in each row. If the last value(s) along a row
are not defined, the program gives them the last previously defined value within that row.

Therefore, based on the defined field-dependent friction values, the program generates the following
grid automatically (where values in italics represent those provided by the program):

Sliding Distance
Temperature 0.1 0.2 0.5 0.7
100 0.3 0.35 0.5 0.5
200 0.2 0.2 0.14 0.1

7.2. Example: One-Dimensional Interpolation

To demonstrate the interpolation of data in a sparsely defined grid, consider the results of a 2-D inter-
polation at a temperature of 100 and a sliding distance of 0.40. In this case, the program performs only
a 1-D interpolation because the defined temperature value (100) lies directly on the defined grid field.
For this case, the program obtains a friction coefficient value of 0.45 based on the following calculations:

= 0 +α 1− 0 Equation (1)

where

− Equation (2)
α=

−

Substituting the tabular values

x = 0.4, x0 = 0.2, x1 = 0.5

y0 = 0.35 y1 = 0.5

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
156 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Example: Two-Dimensional Interpolation

Substituting these values into Equation (2):

− Equation (3)
α= =
−

and solving for the interpolated values using Equation (1), we obtain

Equation (4)
= + − =

7.3. Example: Two-Dimensional Interpolation

Consider the case where a true 2-D interpolation is required at a temperature of 180 and a sliding distance
of 0.40. The program performs three different linear interpolations to determine the property value
within the grid. When performing two-dimensional interpolation, the program always interpolates first
along the two relevant rows of the grid (Temperature in this case), then between the rows.

In this example, the program performs the first interpolation at a temperature of 100 and a sliding dis-
tance of 0.4, yielding the result of 0.45 (as shown in Equation (4)).

The program performs the second interpolation for a temperature of 200 and a sliding
distance of 0.4. In this case, we find that

x = 0.4, x0 = 0.2, x1 = 0.5

y0 = 0.2 y1 = 0.14

Substituting these values into Equation (2):

− Equation (5)
α= =
−

and solving for the interpolated values using Equation (1), we obtain

Equation (6)
= + − =

Finally, the program performs a third interpolation between the temperature value of
100 and 200 at a sliding distance of 0.4.

t = 180, t0 = 100, t1 = 200

y0 = 0.45 y1 = 0.16

Substituting these values into Equation (2):

− Equation (7)
α= =
−

and solving for the interpolated values using Equation (1), we obtain

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 157
Chapter 7: Understanding Field Variable Interpolation

Equation (8)
= + − =

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
158 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 8: GUI-Inaccessible Material Properties
The following material properties are not available via the material property menus of the interactive
GUI. You can specify them from the command line or input file. Subsequent graphic display and post-
processing is still displayed.

Material Property TB Command Lab Value

Anisotropic Hyperelasticity AHYPER
Bergstrom-Boyce BB
Mullins Effect CDM
Fracture criterion for crack CGCR
growth simulation (CGROW)
Cohesive Zone Separation CZM
Damage Evolution Law DMGE
Damage Initiation Criteria DMGI
Extended Drucker-Prager EDP
Experimental Data EXPE
Material Strength Limits FCLI
Fluid FLUI
Contact Friction FRIC
Gurson's Model GURSON
Porous media PM

Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 159
 Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
160 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.